Panasonic Manual de Instalacion KX ns500

Installation Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No. KX-NS500
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1 For Your Safety (Page 18)" before using this product.
KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 004.10000 or later
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/
System Components
System Components
System Components for KX-NS500
Category Model No. Description
Main Unit KX-NS500 Main Unit

Activation Key Codes*1 KX-NSE101 Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 1 User (1
Mobile User)
KX-NSE105 Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 5 Users (5
Mobile Users)
Mobile Users)
Mobile Users)
KX-NSE201 Activate 1 IP-CS for expansion to 8ch Distributed type
of Activation key (1 IP-CS channel expansion)
KX-NSM102 2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (2 IP Trunk)
KX-NSM201 1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone
Activation Key (1 IPSoftphone/IP PT)
KX-NSM501 1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (1
IP PT)
KX-NSM505 5-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key (5
IP PT)
KX-NSM510 10-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(10 IP PT)
KX-NSM520 20-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
(20 IP PT)
2 Installation Manual
System Components
KX-NSM701 1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (1 SIP

Extension)
Extension)
Extension)
Extension)
KX-NSN001 Activation Key for One-look Network (One-look
Network)
KX-NSN002 Activation Key for QSIG Network (QSIG Network)
KX-NSU002 Activation Key for Two-way Recording Control
(Two-way REC Control)
KX-NSU003 Activation Key for Message Backup (Message
Backup)
KX-NSU102 2-Channel Unified Messaging Activation Key (2 UM
Port)
KX-NSU104 4-Channel Unified Messaging Activation Key (4 UM
Port)
KX-NSU201 Activation Key for Unified Messaging E-mail
Notification for 1 User (UM/E-mail 1 User)
Notification for 5 Users (UM/E-mail 5 Users)
Notification for All Users (UM/E-mail All Users)
KX-NSU301 Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 1 User (2way
REC 1 User)
KX-NSU305 Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 5 Users
(2way REC 5 Users)
(2way REC 10 Users)
(2way REC 20 Users)
KX-NSU399 Activation Key for Two-way Recording for All Users
(2way REC All Users)
KX-NSA010 Activation Key for CA Thin Client Server Connection
(CA Thin Client)
Installation Manual 3
System Components
KX-NSA020 Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection (CSTA

Multiplexer)
KX-NSA201 Activation Key for CA PRO for 1 User (CA Pro 1 user)
KX-NSA205 Activation Key for CA PRO for 5 Users (CA Pro 5
users)
users)
users)
users)
KX-NSA301 Activation Key for CA ACD Monitor for 1 ICD
Supervisor (CA Supervisor)
KX-NSA401 Activation Key for CA Operator Console (CA Console)
KX-NSA901 Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 1 User (CA
Network 1 user)
KX-NSA905 Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 5 Users (CA
Network 5 users)
Network 10 users)
Network 40 users)
KX-NSA949 Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 128 Users
(CA Network 128 users)
KX-NSB0001 Activation Key for Poltys C. Bridge (Poltys C. Bridge)
KX-NSB0002 Activation Key for PSDN Option-1 (PSDN Option-1)
KX-NSB0003 Activation Key for PSDN Option-2 (PSDN Option-2)
KX-NSB0004 Activation Key for Poltys CCAccounting
KX-NSB0005 Activation Key for Poltys CCAccounting A.L.
KX-NSB0006 Activation Key for Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
KX-NSB0007 Activation Key for Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.
KX-NSB0008 Activation Key for Poltys CCView
KX-NSB0009 Activation Key for Poltys CCView A.L.
KX-NSB0010 Activation Key for Poltys CCView add. PBX
KX-NSB0011 Activation Key for Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.
KX-NSB0012 Activation Key for Poltys Number notice
KX-NSB0013 Activation Key for Poltys Number notice A.L.
KX-NSB0014 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 Ports)
System Components
KX-NSB0016 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 Ports)

KX-NSB0101 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Start for 1 User
(Poltys CA RCS-Start 1 user)
KX-NSB0105 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Start for 5 Users
(Poltys CA RCS-Start 5 users)
KX-NSB0201 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Extend for 1 User
(Poltys CA RCS-Extend 1 user)
KX-NSB0205 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Extend for 5 Users
(Poltys CA RCS-Extend 5 users)
KX-NSB0210 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Extend for 10
Users (Poltys CA RCS-Extend 10 users)
KX-NSB0249 Activation Key for Poltys CA RCS-Extend for 128
Users (Poltys CA RCS-Extend 128 users)
KX-NSB0404 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analogue (4 users)
KX-NSB0408 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analogue (8 users)
KX-NSB0412 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analogue (12
users)
users)
users)
KX-NSB0504 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analogue A.L. (4
users)
users)
users)
users)
users)
KX-NSB0608 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital (8 users)
KX-NSB0708 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8
users)
System Components

users)
users)
KX-NSB0801 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI (1 Port)
KX-NSB0802 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI (2 Ports)
KX-NSB0901 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 Port)
KX-NSB0902 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 Ports)
KX-NSB1001 Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor
KX-NSB1005 Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 user
Bundle)
KX-NSB1101 Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.
KX-NSB1105 Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (5
user Bundle)
KX-NSB1201 Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up
KX-NSB1205 Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 user
Bundle)
KX-NSB1301 Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.
KX-NSB1305 Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (5
user Bundle)
KX-NSB1401 Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent
KX-NSB1405 Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent (5 user Bundle)
KX-NSB1501 Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent A.L.
KX-NSB1505 Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 user Bundle)
KX-NSF101 Activation Key for CTI interface (CTI interface)
KX-NSF201 Activation key for Built-in ACD Report, Announcement
of waiting number for Queuing (Call Centre Feature
Enhancement)
Physical Cards
DSP Card Slot KX-NS5110 VoIP DSP Card (S Type) (DSP S)

KX-NS5111 VoIP DSP Card (M Type) (DSP M)
KX-NS5112 VoIP DSP Card (L Type) (DSP L)
SD Memory Cards KX-NS5134 SD Memory Card (XS Type) (SD XS)
Slot
KX-NS5135 SD Memory Card (S Type) (SD S)
KX-NS5136 SD Memory Card (M Type) (SD M)
System Components
Expansion Master KX-NS5130 Expansion Master Card (EXP-M)

Slot
Remote Card Slot KX-TDA0196 Remote Modem Card (RMT)
Trunk/Doorphone KX-NS5162 Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
Slot
KX-NS5180 6-port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT6)
KX-NS5282*2 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2)
KX-NS5284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)
KX-NS5290 PRI Card (PRI23)
KX-NS5290CE PRI30 / E1 Trunk Card (PRI30/E1)
Extension Slot KX-NS5170 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC4)
KX-NS5171 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)
KX-NS5172 16-port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)
KX-NS5173 8-Port SLT Card (MCSLC8)
Proprietary Equipment KX-A228 S/M-type Back-up Battery Cable
*1
Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the documentation for
CA.
*2
This card is not available in some countries/areas.
System Components for Expansion Unit

SPR KX-NS520 Expansion Unit

Trunk/Doorphone Slot KX-NS5162 Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
KX-NS5180 6-port Analogue Trunk Card (LCOT6)
KX-NS5282*1 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2)
KX-NS5284 4-Port BRI Card (BRI4)
KX-NS5290 PRI Card (PRI23)
KX-NS5290CE PRI30 / E1 Trunk Card (PRI30/E1)
Extension Slot KX-NS5170 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC4)
KX-NS5171 8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)
KX-NS5172 16-port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)
*1
System Components
Equipment Compatibility for Main Unit

The PBX supports the following equipment:
Cell Stations
DECT
• DECT 2-Channel Cell Stations Unit Using DLC Card for DECT Portable Station (KX-TDA0155CE)
• DECT 8-Channel Cell Stations Unit Using DLC Card for DECT Portable Station (KX-TDA0158CE)
• DECT 8-Channel IP Cell Station Unit Using a V-IPCS4 Card for DECT Portable Station
(KX-NCP0158CE)
• DECT 4-Channel IP Cell Station Unit Using a V-IPCS4 Card for DECT Portable Station (KX-NS0154CE)
2.4 GHz CS
• 2.4 GHz 2-Channel Cell Stations Unit Using DLC Card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TDA0151)
SIP based DECT
• DECT Cell Station Unit (SIP) Using a V-UTEXT32 Card for DECT Portable Station (SIP) (KX-UDS124)
Doorphones
• Doorphone (KX-T30865, KX-T7765)
Telephones
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones
• IP proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series)
• Digital proprietary telephone (e.g., KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, KX-T7600 series)
• Analogue proprietary telephone (e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• DSS Console (e.g., KX-DT390, KX-DT590, KX-T7640)
• IP softphones (e.g., KX-NCS8100)
• Portable stations (e.g., KX-TCA364, KX-WT115)
SIP Phones
• KX-UT series SIP phones (e.g., KX-UT133, KX-UT248, KX-UT670)
• KX-UDT series portable stations (e.g., KX-UDT111)
• IP conferencing phones (e.g., KX-NT700)
• Third party SIP phones (SIP hardphones/SIP softphones)
Other
• Single line telephones
Note
• For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset) that can be connected to a
particular telephone, refer to the telephone’s manual.
• For other equipment that can be connected to the PBX, refer to "2.1.2 System Connection Diagram".
• The PBX does not support the following Panasonic proprietary telephones:
– KX-NT136 IP proprietary telephone
– KX-NT400 IP proprietary telephone
– KX-HGT100 SIP telephone
– KX-TDA0300 PC Console
– KX-TDA0350 PC Phone
– KX-T7000 series proprietary telephone
• Operation of the KX-NS0154 depends on the PBX software file version and the firmware version of the
KX-NS0154. You can confirm the compatibility on the Panasonic Web site:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx
System Components
Trunk Adaptors
• E1 Trunk Adaptor (KX-NS8188)
• PRI Adaptor (KX-NS8290)
Equipment Compatibility for Expansion Unit

You can connect supported Expansion Units to expand the usage of legacy terminals and trunks.
If an Expansion Unit is connected to the Main Unit, the following equipment is also supported.
Cell Stations
DECT
• 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable Station
(KX-TDA0155CE)
• 8-Channel High-density Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT Portable
Station (KX-TDA0158CE)
2.4 GHz CS
• 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
(KX-TDA0151)
Telephones
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones
• Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, and KX-T7600 series)
• Portable Station (e.g., KX-TD7600 series, KX-TCA series)
• DSS Console (e.g., KX-DT390, KX-DT590, KX-T7640)
• Analogue Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7700 series)
Note
The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are not available even if an expansion unit is connected:
• KX-TDA0300 PC Console
• KX-TDA0350 PC Phone
• KX-T7000 series proprietary telephone
Voice Processing System
Voice Processing System (e.g., KX-TVM series)
Notice
• This PBX supports SIP extensions. However, some PBX features may not be available depending on the
type of telephone.
• Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
• Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks
Note
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas. Please
consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
System Components
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NS500NE) is omitted unless necessary.
List of Abbreviations
• CA ® Communication Assistant
• IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone
• PS ® Portable Station
• SIP Extension ® Extensions of the PBX which use Session Initiation Protocol for communication.
• SLT ® Single Line Telephone
• S-PS ® SIP-CS compatible Portable Station
• APT ® Analogue Proprietary Telephone
• DPT ® Digital Proprietary Telephone
• SIP-CS ® SIP based DECT Cell Station unit
• IP-CS ® IP Cell Station unit
Introduction
Introduction
This Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the Panasonic IP-PBX,
KX-NS500. It provides instructions for installing the hardware, and programming the PBX using Web
Maintenance Console. This PBX can also be programmed by using PT. Refer to the PT Programming Manual
for more information.
The Structure of this Manual

This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1 Safety Precautions
Provides important information intended to prevent personal injury and property damage.
Section 2 System Outline
Provides general information on the PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.
Section 3 Information about the Activation Keys
Provides information on activation keys, including how to obtain activation keys.
Section 4 Installation
Describes the procedures to install the PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, optional
service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion
and peripheral equipment installation is included.
Section 5 Programming Information
Describes the installation procedure, structure, and functions of the Web Maintenance Console for
programming IP telephones and the PBX. Further information on programming the PBX for use with SIP
trunks and a VoIP network is included.
Section 6 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
Provides information about stacking Expansion Unit.
Section 7 Troubleshooting
Provides information on the PBX and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 8 Networking Information
Provides information about topics such as using the PBX in a VoIP network, and the TCP ports used by
the PBX.
Section 9 Appendix
Provides information about System Prompt Languages and the revision history.
About the Other Manuals

Along with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:
Feature Guide
Describes all basic, optional and programmable features of the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PC.
PT Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PT.
User Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using IP-PTs, SIP phones, SLTs, PSs, or DSS Consoles.
About the software version of your PBX

The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this
manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see "How do I confirm the software version of the PBX
or installed cards?" in "2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)" of the PC Programming Manual.
Introduction
Trademarks
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use
of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
• Microsoft, Outlook, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Safety Precautions .................................................................................17
1.1 For Your Safety ...............................................................................................................18
1.2 Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................24
1.3 Precautions ......................................................................................................................25
1.4 Data Security ...................................................................................................................27
2 System Outline .......................................................................................29
2.1 Basic System Construction ...........................................................................................30
2.1.1 System Configurations ...................................................................................................30
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram ..........................................................................................32
2.2 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................35
2.2.1 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................35
2.3 Specifications ..................................................................................................................39
2.3.1 General Description ........................................................................................................39
2.3.2 Characteristics ................................................................................................................41
2.3.3 System Capacity ............................................................................................................42
3 Information about the Activation Keys ................................................59
3.1 Information about the Activation Keys .........................................................................60
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys ............................................................60
3.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System ......................................................75
3.1.3 Using CTI Applications ...................................................................................................76
4 Installation ..............................................................................................79
4.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................80
4.1.1 Before Installation ...........................................................................................................80
4.2 Installation of the PBX ....................................................................................................82
4.2.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................82
4.2.2 Names and Locations .....................................................................................................83
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover .....................................................................................87
4.2.4 Frame Earth Connection ................................................................................................89
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards ............................................................90
4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card ...................................................................104
4.2.7 Types of Connectors ....................................................................................................107
4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core ...............................................................................................109
4.2.9 19-inch Rack Mounting .................................................................................................110
4.2.10 Wall Mounting ...............................................................................................................111
4.2.11 Surge Protector Installation ..........................................................................................115
4.2.12 Backup Battery Connection ..........................................................................................118
4.3 The Mother Board and Expansion Cards ....................................................................120
4.3.1 Mother Board ................................................................................................................120
4.3.1.1 Mother Board in the Main Unit ...................................................................................120
4.3.1.2 Mother Board in an Expansion Unit ...........................................................................123
4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory S Card (KX-NS5135), SD Memory M
Card (KX-NS5136) .......................................................................................................124
4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L Card
(KX-NS5112) ................................................................................................................125
4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500 (installed by default) ...................................................................127
4.3.5 DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default) .................................................................130
4.3.6 MCSLC16 in the Main Unit (installed by default) ..........................................................131
4.3.7 EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default) .......................................................133
4.3.8 PFT in KX-NS520 (installed by default) ........................................................................134
Table of Contents
4.3.9 MCSLC16 in KX-NS520 (installed by default) ..............................................................136

4.3.10 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196) ..................................................................138
4.4 Virtual Cards ..................................................................................................................139
4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards ..........................................................................141
4.5.1 LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180) ...........................................................................................141
4.5.2 PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE) ..................................................................................142
4.5.3 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290) ............................................................................................145
4.5.4 BRI2 Card (KX-NS5282) ..............................................................................................147
4.5.5 BRI4 Card (KX-NS5284) ..............................................................................................150
4.5.6 DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170) ..........................................................................................153
4.5.7 DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171) .............................................................................................154
4.5.8 DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172) ...........................................................................................155
4.5.9 MCSLC8 Card (KX-NS5173) ........................................................................................156
4.5.10 MCSLC16 Card (KX-NS5174) ......................................................................................157
4.6 Expansion Card .............................................................................................................158
4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS5130) ...........................................................................................158
4.7 The Doorphone Card ....................................................................................................160
4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162) .............................................................................................160
4.8 Connection of Extensions ............................................................................................162
4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ........................162
4.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions ..........................................................................163
4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .....................................................165
4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor .......................167
4.10 Connection of Peripherals ...........................................................................................169
4.11 LAN Connection ............................................................................................................171
4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit ................................................................................171
4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones ............................................................................173
4.12 Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................176
4.13 Starting the PBX ............................................................................................................178
5 Programming Information ...................................................................181
5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console .....................................................................182
5.2 PC Connection ..............................................................................................................183
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console ............................................................................186
5.4 Programming the PBX ..................................................................................................197
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard .......................................................................................................197
5.4.2 Enabling the DHCP Server Feature .............................................................................202
5.4.3 Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX .....................................................................202
5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys .............................................................................203
5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys ............................................................................203
5.5 Programming an H.323 QSIG Network ........................................................................205
5.5.1 Assigning the Hunt Pattern ...........................................................................................205
5.5.2 Programming the Address Translation Table ...............................................................206
5.5.3 Programming the Network Settings ..............................................................................208
5.6 Programming SIP Trunks .............................................................................................210
5.7 Assigning Networking Information to IP Telephones ................................................212
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information ...........................................................................212
5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters ............................................................................................233
5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters .............................................................................................236
5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters .........................................................................................240
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports ..............................................................................................243
5.7.6 ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only) .............................................................................249
5.8 Registering IP Telephones ...........................................................................................251
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones ...........................................................................................251
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones .......................................................................................257
Table of Contents
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site .......................................................................260

5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway ...............266
5.9 Configuration of Users .................................................................................................275
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice ..........................................................277
5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes .......................................................................281
6 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units ...............................................283
6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units ........................................................................284
7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................287
7.1 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................288
7.1.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................288
7.1.2 Connection ...................................................................................................................291
7.1.3 Operation ......................................................................................................................292
7.1.4 Error Messages ............................................................................................................294
7.1.5 Restarting the PBX .......................................................................................................296
7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log .......................................................................................298
8 Networking Information .......................................................................301
8.1 Information about Using an IP Network ......................................................................302
8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX .............................................................................302
8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server .................................................305
8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN) ......................................................................................................306
8.1.4 Jitter Buffer ...................................................................................................................307
8.1.5 Voice Activity Detection (VAD) .....................................................................................307
8.1.6 Network Configuration ..................................................................................................308
8.1.7 Network Devices ..........................................................................................................312
8.1.8 QoS (Quality of Service) ...............................................................................................313
8.1.9 Network Time Protocol (NTP) ......................................................................................314
8.2 Information about Using One-look Network ...............................................................315
8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net ...................................................................................315
8.3 H.323 Trunks ..................................................................................................................317
8.3.1 Avoid Multiple IP Networks ...........................................................................................317
8.3.2 Gatekeeper ...................................................................................................................318
8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment ................................................................................................318
8.3.4 Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications ...................................................................321
8.4 SIP Trunks .....................................................................................................................322
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service ...................................................................................................322
8.4.2 SIP Requirements ........................................................................................................325
8.4.3 Router Requirements ...................................................................................................325
8.4.4 Bandwidth Requirements .............................................................................................325
8.4.5 Virtual SIP Trunk Card Specifications ..........................................................................327
8.5 Types of PBX Networks ................................................................................................328
8.5.1 H.323 QSIG Network ....................................................................................................328
8.6 Port Security ..................................................................................................................329
9 Appendix ...............................................................................................333
9.1 System Prompt Languages ..........................................................................................334
9.2 Revision History ............................................................................................................335
9.2.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ....................................................................335
Table of Contents
Section 1
Safety Precautions
This section provides important information intended to

prevent personal injury and property damage.
1.1 For Your Safety
1.1 For Your Safety

To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.
This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.
This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.
The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.
Notice
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for injuries or property damage resulting from failures arising out of
improper installation or operation inconsistent with this documentation.
1.1 For Your Safety
WARNING
For All Telephone Equipment
• Do not install the product in any other way than described in relevant manuals.
• Do not install the product in a place exposed to rain or moisture, or a place where water, oil, or other liquids
can drip or splash onto on the product. Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair
the performance of the product.
• Do not install the system in the following locations:
a. Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong. Such activity may lead to the product falling
over and causing injury, or may impair the product’s performance.
b. Areas with high amounts of dust. High amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and impair
the performance of the product.
• Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface. If the product were to fall over, it may cause
injury or damage to the product.
• Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets
or extension cables used. If outlets, power strips, extension cords, etc. are used in a manner that exceeds
their rated capacity, they emit large amounts of heat, which could cause a fire.
• The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel. The product should be
used as-is from the time of purchase; it should not be disassembled or modified. Disassembly or
modification can cause a fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.
• Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Small objects, such as the hook clip, SD card and battery connector cover, pose a choking hazard. Keep
small objects out of reach of children.
• Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply
specified on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your office/home, consult
your dealer or local power company.
• For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug. If you do not have an earthed outlet,
please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
• When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of
fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
a. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
b. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
c. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected
at the network interface.
d. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
e. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet and have it serviced by qualified service personnel in the following
cases:
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
1.1 For Your Safety
d. If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are
explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. If product performance deteriorates.
For the PBX
• Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull, bend, rest objects on, or chafe the power cord and plug. Damage to the power cord or plug
can cause fire or electric shock.
• Do not attempt to repair the power cord or plug. If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed, contact
an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre for a replacement.
• Do not leave the slot open if an option service card is not installed after removing a dummy cover plate.
Make sure to insert the slot cover included with the option service card into the slot.
• When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment (attachment
bracket, screws) made for use with the PBX.
• If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return
the unit to your dealer.
• To prevent fires, electric shock, injury, or damage to the product, be sure to follow these guidelines when
performing any wiring or cabling:
a. Before performing any wiring or cabling, unplug the product’s power cord from the outlet. After
completing all wiring and cabling, plug the power cord back into the outlet.
b. When laying cables, do not bundle the product’s power cord with the power cords of other devices.
c. Do not place any objects on top of the cables connected to the PBX.
d. When running cables along the floor, use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on.
e. Do not run any cables under carpeting.
• Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is made of concrete or thick wood, and is strong
enough to support the unit (approx. 35 kg). Do not attach the unit to walls made from plasterboard or thin
plywood. Attaching the unit to areas where there are strong winds, or where shocks or vibrations are
frequent or strong, may lead to the product falling over.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws and washers) included with the PBX.
• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes, but it may not
be enough to protect the PBX and to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. A permanent connection
between earth and the earth terminal of the PBX must be made.
• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution or to
protect the PBX from the bad effects of external noise in the case of a lightning strike. (See "4.2.4 Frame
Earth Connection".)
• Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shock.
• Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an injury.
1.1 For Your Safety
• Make sure that the AC outlet is properly earthed, then securely connect the 3-pin AC plug including the
earthed pin.
• A lithium battery is used in the main unit. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with an
incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION
• The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C) and vibration, and
should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean
with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners.
For the PBX
• Do not install the system in the following locations:

a. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C)
b. Areas where sulphuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.
c. Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.
d. Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at
least 5 cm to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.
e. Locations where condensation can occur.
• Do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of the
PBX.
• When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least
10 cm around the PBX’s fan.
• When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother board.
Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
• When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
• Once you have started the PBX, if you unplug the PBX, do not initialise it again as described in "System
Initialisation Procedure". Otherwise, your programmed data will be cleared. To restart the PBX, refer to
"7.1.5 Restarting the PBX".
• Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or wearing
an earthing strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
• When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power
connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect
the telecom connection.
1.1 For Your Safety
• The plug of power supply cordset is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is
located near the equipment and is easily accessible.
• Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked
by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealed
environment unless proper ventilation is provided.
• Make sure that the surface behind the PBX is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the back
of the PBX will not be blocked.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack or wall.
• Use only the AC power cord included with the PBX. A certified power supply cord has to be used with this
equipment. The relevant national installation and/or equipment regulations shall be considered. A certified
power supply cord not lighter than ordinary polyvinyl chloride flexible cord according to IEC 60227
(designation H05VV-F 3G 0.75 mm²) shall be used.
• When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, make sure that the installation of the unit does not cause the
temperature of the rack to exceed its limit.
• Make sure to install all necessary optional service cards in the PBX before performing the wall mounting
procedure. If it is necessary to install or remove a card, make sure to detach the PBX from the wall before
installing or removing the card.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or plates in
the wall.
• Before opening the top cover, the AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
• Disconnect the AC power source before servicing the equipment.
• For safety reasons, close the top cover and tighten the screws before operating the PBX.
• If the PBX is not installed properly using the securing correct methods, the PBX may fall causing serious
damage.
• Performing surge protection is essential. Make sure to follow the instructions in "4.2.11 Surge Protector
Installation".
• It is strongly recommended to use SSL encrypted communication when the PC is accessing the PBX via
the Internet. To use SSL encryption, routers must have a port set up for https communication.
• Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers and other office equipment, as noise generated by such
equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.
• Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring is
completed.
• Trunks should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "4.2.11 Surge Protector
Installation".
• When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off, and the AC
power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
• For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor
must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
• When connecting a PRI30/E1, PRI23, BRI2 or BRI4 card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not
connect to the U interface of the trunk directly.
• PRI ports of PRI30/E1 and PRI23 cards are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
• The MOH port and Pager port are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices,
or via a Line Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.
WARNING
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
1.1 For Your Safety
Notice
• Read and understand all instructions.
For the PBX

• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of
the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the trunks:
a. Disconnect the PBX from all trunks.
b. Connect known working SLTs to those trunks.
c. Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the trunk that the SLT is connected
to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the
trunks until it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
1.2 Important Safety Instructions
1.2 Important Safety Instructions

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,
in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Rack Mount Instructions—The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the installation
instructions:
a. Elevated Operating Ambient—If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration
should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient
temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
b. Reliable Earthing—Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular
attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g., use of power strips).
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
1.3 Precautions
1.3 Precautions
For users in the European Union only
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment
which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,
please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies
with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
1.3 Precautions
The KX-NS500NE is designed to interwork with the:

• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. declares that the KX-NS500NE is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE)
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for
download by visiting:
http://www.ptc.panasonic.eu
Contact to Authorised Representative:

Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
1.4 Data Security
1.4 Data Security

In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to
do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.
What is User Information?

User Information is defined as:
1. Information stored on the SD Memory Card:
Sound files for UM feature and call charge data.
2. Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device:
System data, sound files for MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Messages), and activation key
files.
Requirements
1. Always make backups of data stored on the System memory and/or perform regular system data backups
to a USB memory device.
For details about making backups of data stored on the System memory, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
For details about backing up the system data to a USB memory device, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data
Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.
2. To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
3. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping the password secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your password regularly.
4. Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a. Make a backup of data stored on the System memory.
5. When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device, the confidentiality of that
information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or the USB memory
device, ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physically
unusable.
1.4 Data Security
Section 2
System Outline
This section provides general information on the PBX,

including the system capacity and specifications.
2.1.1 System Configurations
2.1 Basic System Construction

Main Unit
The main unit contains a mother board for controlling PBX functions.
Stacking Expansion Unit KX-NS520

Up to 3 Expansion Unit KX-NS520s can be connected to a KX-NS500 to expand the usage of legacy terminals
and trunks. A KX-NS520 connected to a KX-NS500 functions as a expansion unit and will be controlled by the
KX-NS500.
To connect a KX-NS520 as an expansion unit, install a EXP-M card in the KX-NS500. Then, connect the
EXP-M card and the EXP-S which is in KX-NS520 directly with Category 5 cable.
For details about connecting KX-NS500 and expansion unit KX-NS520, see "4.6.1 EXP-M Card
(KX-NS5130)".
Example:
Main Unit *1
EXP-M
Expansion Unit *2 Expansion Unit *2 Expansion Unit *2
EXP-S EXP-S EXP-S
*1
KX-NS500
*2
KX-NS520
One-Look Network with NS-Net *1
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected as a distributed networked system using a private IP network.
The networked system is called a One-look network. In a One-look network, a KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the
Master unit, which controls the other PBXs, known as Slave units.
For more information about One-look network, refer to "8.2 Information about Using One-look Network".
*1
NS-Net is a network protocol only used for Panasonic products.
H.323 QSIG network

If the network will include non-KX-NS500 PBXs (e.g., KX-TDE200, KX-NCP500), then an H.323 QSIG network
is necessary.
An H.323 QSIG network is preferable if strict resource separation between sites is necessary. In a QSIG
network, resources are not available to extension users of other PBXs without explicit programming.
For details about programming the H.323 QSIG network, refer to "5.5 Programming an H.323 QSIG
Network".
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
Private ITSP*1
IP Network Network
WAN Remote PC IP-PT IP Softphone, SIP-CS S-PS IP-CS PS CTI Server PC

CA*3 Client PC
Router DCE*2 SIP Phone
(e.g., ADSL Modem)
Trunk Adaptor
Expansion Unit*5
Main Unit*4
Trunk
(Telephone Company Lines)
E1/PRI
Expansion Unit*5
Trunk
(Telephone Company Lines) SLT
Analogue/BRI/PRI
PC
External Sensor Expansion Unit*5
Fax Machine
Doorphone & Door Opener
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH) PC
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
*1
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
*2
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
*3
CA: Communication Assistant
*4
KX-NS500
*5
KX-NS520
Main Unit*2 System Connection Diagram
ISDN PRI/E1 PRI30/E1 EXP-M

Line
(Digital Trunk) PRI23 EXP-S EXP-S EXP-S
ISDN BRI Line BRI2

(Digital Trunk)
Telephone
Company BRI4 DPH2
LCOT6
External Sensor
Analogue Pre-installed Doorphone & Door Opener
Trunk MCSLC16
Pre-installed
LCOT6
MCSLC8/16
SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

Radio
Pre-installed
DLC2
DHLC4 DTP I/F PS

Amplifier Pager/Speaker APT DSS DPT DSS
Console Console CS
RMT DLC8/16
USB Memory Device USB
DPT*1 DPT*1 DPT*1 PC
SD Memory
Batteries Card XS Type
DSP S SD Memory
Card S Type
DSP M
Uninterruptible Power SD Memory
Supply DSP L Card MType
Virtual Slot
SIP Phone SIP-CS S-PS IP-CS PS
V-IPCS4 V-IPEXT32
PC
V-IPGW16 V-SIPEXT32 LAN
Private IP Router V-SIPGW16 V-UTEXT32

Network WAN IP-PT IP Softphone, PC CTI Server
CA Client PC
ITSP DCE Router Mountable Equipment
Network (e.g., ADSL
Modem)
Trunk Adaptor Trunk Adaptor
ISDN PRI Line E1 Line
(Digital Trunk) (Digital Trunk)
Telephone Company
*1
Some DPT is not available for this connection.
*2
KX-NS500
Expansion Unit*2 System Connection Diagram
Analogue
Trunk LCOT6
EXP-S EXP-M
BRI2
ISDN BRI Line
Telephone (Digital Trunk)
Company BRI4 DPH2
ISDN PRI/E1 PRI30/E1 External Sensor

Line Pre-installed Doorphone & Door Opener
(Digital Trunk) MCSLC16
PRI23
MCSLC8/16
SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine
Batteries
DHLC4
APT DSS DPT DSS DTP I/F PS
Console Console CS
DLC8/16
USB
Mountable Equipment
DPT*1 DPT*1 DPT*1 PC
*1
Some DPT is not available for this connection.
*2
KX-NS520
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
2.2 Optional Equipment

KX-NS500
Model No. Model Name Description
KX-NS5110 VoIP DSP Card (S Type) (DSP S) A DSP card is a digital signal processor card with
DSP resources that can be used for VoIP calls,
conferences, the Unified Messaging feature, and
the DISA/OGM feature. The DSP cards are
compliant with ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec
methods.
Depending on the amount of your DSP resource
KX-NS5111 VoIP DSP Card (M Type) (DSP M)
needs, DSP S, DSP M, or DSP L cards can be
installed. The number of resources provided by
each type of DSP card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
KX-NS5112 VoIP DSP Card (L Type) (DSP L) One of DSP cards can be installed on the
motherboard.
To operate VoIP or Unified Messaging, one of
DSP S, DSP M or DSP L card must be installed
in the DSP card slots.
KX-NS5134 SD Memory Card (XS Type) (SD A combination card including

Memory XS) • Memory with maximum of 40 hours Voice
Mail recording time.
• Memory with Maximum of 40,000 SMDR
data and 10,000 Hotel Billing Data
• Store 300,000 ACD report data
• You cannot install commercially available SD
card.
KX-NS5135 SD Memory Card (S Type) (SD A combination card including
Memory S) • Memory with maximum of 200 hours Voice
data and 10,000 Hotel Billing Data
card.
KX-NS5136 SD Memory Card (M Type) (SD A combination card including

Memory M) • Memory with maximum of 400 hours Voice
date and 10,000 Hotel Billing Data
card.
KX-NS5162 Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2) 2-port doorphone card for 2 doorphone, 2 door
opener, and 2 external sensor.
KX-NS5130 Expansion Master Card (EXP-M) A stacking card to be installed in a KX-NS500.
Up to 3 Expansion Unit KX-NS520 can be
connected.
KX-NS5180 6-port Analogue Trunk Card 6 analogue trunk ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK
(LCOT6) with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/
DTMF). Two ports are power failure transfer
(PFT) port.
KX-NS5290 PRI Card (PRI23) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B
channels).
NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
KX-NS5290CE PRI30/E1 Card (PRI30/E1) A combination card including:
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port (30B
channels).
EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
• 1 E1 port (30B channels).
ITU-T standard compliant.
KX-NS5282 2-Port BRI Card (BRI2) 2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card.
KX-NS5170 4-Port Super Hybrid Extension 4-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs,
Card (DHLC4) APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs.
KX-NS5171 8-Port Digital Extension Card 8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
(DLC8) consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
KX-NS5172 16-port Digital Extension Card 16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
KX-NS5173 8-Port Single Line Telephone 8-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
Extension Card (MCSLC8) (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
Note
For the maximum number of optional service cards that can be installed in the PBX, refer to "2.3.3 System
Capacity".
KX-NS520
KX-NS5162 Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2) 2-port doorphone card for 2 doorphone, door
opener and 2 external sensor
KX-NS5180 6-port Analogue Trunk Card 6 analogue trunk ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK
(LCOT6) with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/
DTMF).
KX-NS5290 PRI Card (PRI23) 1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B
channels).
NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
KX-NS5290CE PRI30/E1 Card (PRI30/E1) A combination card including:
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port (30B
channels).
KX-NS5170 4-Port Super Hybrid Extension 4-port digital hybrid extension card for DPTs,
Card (DHLC4) APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs.
KX-NS5171 8-Port Digital Extension Card 8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
KX-NS5172 16-port Digital Extension Card 16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
2.3.1 General Description
2.3 Specifications

KX-NS500
Main CPU Cortex A8 600 MHz
Power Input 100 V AC to 130 V AC: 2.2 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC: 1.3 A;
50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption (when fully 110 W
mounted)
External Backup Battery External battery port is supported.
Memory Backup Duration 7 years
Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling with Caller ID (FSK/DTMF)
1600 W Maximum
Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling with Caller ID (FSK)
Port 1-2 (on pre-installed MCSLC16) support PFT in
combination with the port 1-2 (on pre-installed LCOT6)
connected to an analogue trunk respectively.
Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Operating Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
Environment
Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Conference Call Trunk 32 party conference call
(10 ´ 3-party conference call, 4 ´ 8-party conference call, etc.)
Music on Hold (MOH) Maximum 8 ports (Level Control: 31.5 dB to +31.5 dB per 0.5
dB)
MOH: Selectable Internal/External Music Source Port
External Paging Maximum 6 Ports (Volume Control: -15.5 dB to per 0.5 dB)
LAN Port 1 (for LAN connection) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Auto MDI/MDI-X)
Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
PT-interface CS (High-density) 4-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on Key 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
Module
Air-cooling method FAN
Dimension 430 mm (W) ´ 88 mm (H) ´ 367 mm (D)

Weight (when fully mounted) Under 4.5 kg*1
*1
Except the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
KX-NS520
Main CPU Cortex A8 300 MHz
Power Input 100 V AC to 130 V AC: 2.2 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC: 1.3 A;
50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption (when fully 110 W
mounted)
External Backup Battery External battery port is supported.
Memory Backup Duration 7 years
Dialling Trunk Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling with Caller ID (FSK/DTMF)
1600 W Maximum
Extension Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling with Caller ID (FSK)
Port 1-4 (on pre-installed MCSLC16) support PFT feature.
Refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections" for more
information.
Mode Conversion DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency 20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Operating Temperature 0 °C to 40 °C
Environment
Humidity 10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Extension Connection Cable SLT 1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
APT 2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
PT-interface CS 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
PT-interface CS (High-density) 4-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on Key 1-pair wire (D1, D2)
Module
Air-cooling method FAN
Dimension 430 mm (W) ´ 88 mm (H) ´ 367 mm (D)
Weight (when fully mounted) Under 4.5 kg*1
*1
Except the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
2.3.2 Characteristics
2.3.2 Characteristics
KX-NS500
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit • SLT: 600 W including set
• Doorphone: 20 W
Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 W minimum
Maximum Number of Extension 1 for SLT
Instruments per Line
Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum
Hookswitch Flash/Recall Timing 24 ms to 2032 ms
Range
Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Sensor Current Limit Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must
be grounded through the DPH2 card. For the connection diagram,
refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)". The PBX detects input from
the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Paging Terminal Impedance 600 W
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal 10 000 W
Impedance
KX-NS520
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit • SLT: 600 W including set
• Doorphone: 20 W
Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 W minimum
Maximum Number of Extension 1 for SLT
Instruments per Line
Ring Voltage 75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Trunk Loop Limit 1600 W maximum
Hookswitch Flash/Recall Timing 24 ms to 2032 ms
Range
Door Opener Current Limit 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Sensor Current Limit Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must
be grounded through the DPH2 card. For the connection diagram,
refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)". The PBX detects input from
the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Paging Terminal Impedance 600 W
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal 10 000 W
Impedance
2.3.3 System Capacity

Type and Maximum Number of Slots
The PBX supports the following type and number of slots.
Mother Board (Main Unit)

Slot Type Maximum Number
Physical Slot DSP Card Slot 1

SD Card Slot 1
EXP-M Card Slot 1
Trunk/Doorphone Slot 2*1
Extension Free Slot 1: If 16 ports Extension card is installed
2: If 16 ports Extension card is not installed
Remote Card Slot 1
Virtual Slot Virtual Trunk Card 4
Virtual Extension Card 4
Virtual IP-CS Card 4
*1
For details about the available installation combination of cards, see "Trunk Option Card Installing Restrictions".
Mother Board (Expansion Unit)

Slot Type Maximum Number
Physical Slot Trunk/Doorphone Slot 2*1

Extension Free Slot 1: If 16 ports Extension card is installed
2: If 16 ports Extension card is not installed
*1
For details about the available installation combination of cards, see "Trunk Option Card Installing Restrictions".
Main Unit
Front View Inside View (The top cover is removed.)
A B C
D E F G H I
A. Front cover plate for the EXP-M Slot

B. Front cover plates for Trunk/Doorphone Card Slots
C. Front cover plates for the Extension Card Slots
D. Extension Card Slot
E. Trunk/Doorphone Card Slot
F. EXP-M Card Slot
G. SD Card Slot
H. DSP Card Slot
I. RMT Card Slot
Expansion Unit
Front View Inside View (The top cover is removed.)
A B
C D E
A. Front cover plates for Trunk/Doorphone Card Slots

B. Front cover plates for the Extension Card Slots
C. Extension Card Slot
D. Trunk/Doorphone Card Slot
E. SD Card Slot (not available)
Virtual Slots of the Mother Board

Example:
V-SIPEXT32
V-SIPGW16 V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16 V-UTEXT32 V-IPCS4
Virtual Slots
Mother Board
Maximum Optional Service Cards

The following number of card can be installed in the Physical Slots or Virtual Slots of the PBX.
Note
• Any card that exceeds the capacity of the PBX will be ignored.
• When the PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.
For KX-NS500 Physical Slot

Slot type Card Name Maximum Number
Pre-installed LCOT6 1
MCSLC16 1
DLC2 1
DSP Card Slot 1
DSP S 1
DSP M 1
DSP L 1
SD Card Slot 1
SD XS 1
SD S 1
SD M 1
Remote Card Slot RMT 1
EXP-M Card Slot EXP-M 1
Trunk/Doorphone Slot*1 2
LCOT6 1
BRI2 1
BRI4 1
PRI23 1
PRI30/E1 1
DPH2 1
Extension Slot*2 (Pattern 1) 2
DHLC4 2
DLC8 2
MCSLC8 2
(Pattern 2) 1
DLC16 1
MCSLC16 1
*1
You can install one DPH2 card and one of the Trunk card.
*2
For Extension Slot, you need to select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2.
DLC16 or MCSLC16 card can be installed in first Extension Slot only.
If you install DLC16 or MCSLC16 card in first Extension slot, you cannot install DHLC4, DLC8 or MCSLC8 in the second Extension
slot.
Cards Installed in Virtual Slots

Card type Card Name Maximum Number
Virtual Trunk Card 4

V-IPGW16 2
V-SIPGW16 4
Virtual Extension Card 4
V-IPEXT32 4
V-SIPEXT32 4
V-UTEXT32 4
Virtual IP-CS Card V-IPCS4 4
For KX-NS520 Physical Slot

Pre-installed MCSLC16 1
Trunk/Doorphone Slot DPH2 1
LCOT6 2
BRI4 2
BRI2 2
PRI23 1
PRI30/E1 1
Extension Slot*1 (Pattern 1) 2
DHLC4 2
DLC8 2
MCSLC8 2
(Pattern 2) 1
DLC16 1
MCSLC16 1
*1
For Extension Slot, you need to select Pattern 1 or Pattern 2.
DLC16 or MCSLC16 card can be installed in first Extension Slot only.
If you install DLC16 or MCSLC16 card in first Extension slot, you cannot install DHLC4, DLC8 or MCSLC8 in the second Extension
slot.
Trunk Option Card Installing Restrictions

The following tables show which combinations of optional trunk cards can be installed.
ü: Available
—: Not available
KX-NS500
2nd Slot
LCOT6 BRI4 BRI2 PRI23 PRI30/E1 DPH2
LCOT6 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü

BRI4 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü
BRI2 — *1
— *1
— *1
— *1
— *1
ü
1st Slot
PRI23 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü
PRI30/E1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü
DPH2 ü ü ü ü ü —*1
*1
This installation combination is not available due to software restrictions.
KX-NS520
2nd Slot
LCOT6 BRI4 BRI2 PRI23 PRI30/E1 DPH2
LCOT6 ü ü ü ü ü ü
BRI4 ü ü ü — *1
— *1
ü
BRI2 ü ü ü —*1 —*1 ü
1st Slot
PRI23 ü —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü
PRI30/E1 ü —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 ü
DPH2 ü ü ü ü ü —*1
*1
Extension Option Card Installing Restrictions

KX-NS500/KX-NS520
2nd Slot
MCSLC16 MCSLC8 DLC16 DLC8 DHLC4
MCSLC16 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1

MCSLC8 —*1 ü —*1 ü ü
1st Slot DLC16 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1 —*1
DLC8 —*1 ü —*1 ü ü
DHLC4 —*1 ü —*1 ü ü
*1
Maximum Trunks, Extensions, VMs, PFT ports and MOHs/Pagers

The PBX supports the following number of trunks and extensions.
KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500
KX-NS500
Trunk (Pre-Installe w/1 w/2 w/3
(Maximum)
d) KX-NS520 KX-NS520s KX-NS520s
Total Number of 6 100 136 172 208
Trunks
Trunk (Physical 6 36 72 108 144

Trunk Card)
LCOT 6 12 24 36 48
BRI 0 8 24 40 56
PRI23 0 23 46 69 92
PRI30 0 30 60 90 120
E1 0 30 60 90 120
Trunk (Virtual Trunk 0 64
Card)
H.323 Trunks 0 32
SIP Trunks 0 64
Total Number of 18 162 194 226 258
Extensions
Extension (Physical 18 34 66 98 130

Extension Card)
SLT 16 32 64 96 128
DPT 2 18 34 50 66
DPT (other) 0 8 16 24 32
APT 0 8 16 24 32
Extension (Virtual 0 128
Extension Card)
IP-PT and 0 128

Softphone
SIP Extension 0 128
KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500

KX-NS500
Trunk (Pre-Installe w/1 w/2 w/3
(Maximum)
d) KX-NS520 KX-NS520s KX-NS520s
SIP Phone 0 128
KX-UT 0 128
Series
SIP DECT 0 128
Total Number of CS 2 36 40 44 48
DPT-CS (2ch) 2 4 8 12 16
DPT-CS (8ch) 0 2 4 6 8
IP-CS (8ch) 0 16
IP-CS (4ch/8ch) 0 32
SIP-CS 0 16
Total Number of PS 128
Total Number of 0 2 4 6 8
Doorphone
Doorphone 0 2 4 6 8
Door Opener 0 2 4 6 8
Sensor 0 2 4 6 8
VM
ESVM (ch) 2
Built-In UM (ch) 0 24
TVM unit 2
DSS Console 0 8 8 8 8
PFT 2 2 6 10 14
MOH/BGM/EPG (6) 6 6 6 6
MOH/BGM (6) 6 6 6 6
EPG (6) 6 6 6 6
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection Capacity

The number of Digital XDP ports that can be assigned depends on the following:
– the number of connected DPTs
– the maximum number of DPTs the PBX can support
The table below shows examples of how many Digital XDP ports can be assigned with different configurations.
For details about the Digital XDP connection, refer to "4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP)
Connection".
KX-NS500 w/ KX-NS500 KX-NS500 w/ KX-NS500 w/ KX-NS500 w/
o option max. 1 KX-NS520 2 KX-NS520 3 KX-NS520
18 34 50 66
No. of DPT ports 2
(16´1+2) (16´2+2) (16´3+2) (16´4+2)
No. of Digital XDP
2 16 32 48 64
ports
32
Total No. of DPTs 4 64 96 128
(16+16)
Power Supply Unit Capacity

The pre-installed power supply unit (PSU) in each PBX supports a different load figure.
PBX Model Maximum Load Figure
KX-NS500 40
KX-NS520 40
Load Figure Calculation
Equipment Type Item Load Figure
PT DPT 1
DPT
(KX-T7400 series/ 3
KX-T7500 series)*1
D-XDP 0.5
APT 1.5
IP-PT 0
SIP-EXT 0
CS DPT I/F CS (2ch) 2
DPT I/F CS (8ch) 8
SLT DHLC4 4
SLC8 8
SLC16 16
KX-NS500 16
KX-NS520 16
*1
KX-T7400 series/KX-T7500 series DPTs connect to a DHLC4 card.
Calculation Example of KX-NS500
Item Units Load Figure
DPT (KX-DT series) 16 16

D-XDP 16 8
SLT 16 16
IP-PT (KX-NT series) 5 0
SIP-EXT 2 0
Total Load Figure 40
Calculation Example of KX-NS520
Item Units Load Figure
DPT (KX-DT series) 16 16

D-XDP 16 8
SLT 16 16
Total Load Figure 40
DSP Resources
DSP cards provide digital signal processor (DSP) resources, and the PBX uses the resources to perform
various PBX operations. The following illustration shows the concept of DSP resource usage. More complex
situations may require additional resources, and in some cases the amount of DSP resources required may
be less than expected.
: Required DSP Resources
0.5 3
Conference
Doorphone*2
1
2
1
Outgoing Message
PRI/E1*2 (DISA)*3
SLT*2
1
Music on Hold (MOH)/
External Paging (EPG)*3 1
1
Analogue
1
Trunk *2
Internal MOH*3 DPT/APT*2
1 2.2
1.3
G.711 G.729A
Unified Messaging
IP-PT
1 UM Tone Generator 1 2.2
G.711 G.711 G.729A

IP-CS
2.2 3
G.729A Echo Canceller*3
PS
PBX
IP Trunk *1
*1
Connections that arrive over a stacking connection require the same amount of DSP resources as shown in this example.
*2
DSP resources are used during conversations between legacy trunks/extensions/Doorphones and IP trunks/extensions.
*3
DSP resources are used when IP trunks or IP extensions access these devices.
Required DSP Resources Assessment

The maximum number of simultaneous calls, operations and features using IP protocols is determined by the
DSP card installed in the PBX.
To decide how much resources are required for the PBX, the DSP Resource Advisor can be useful.
Note
• Calls cannot be made or received when all of the DSP resources are being used.
• The number of required resources must not exceed the DSP resources installed to the PBX.
• For details about the DSP Resource Advisor, refer to "9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1]
Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor" in the PC Programming Manual.
• For information about installing DSP cards, refer to "4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card
(KX-NS5111), DSP L Card (KX-NS5112)".
• The number of available DSP resources is not restricted by any activation keys.
DSP Resource Reservation

DSP resources can be reserved for certain operations to avoid lack of resources for particular operations.
The following examples show cases of allocating and reserving DSP resources.
Note
For details about reserving DSP resources, refer to "5.5.4.1 DSP Resource Reservation" and "5.5.4.2 DSP
Resource Advisor" in the Feature Guide, and "9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP
Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor" in the PC Programming Manual.
Example
In this example, the DSP M (127 DSP resources) is installed and resources are reserved for the following
operations:
Operation Required Resources
VoIP (G.711) Calls 40

Conference Trunks 10
Unified Messaging 8
Two-way Recording Operations 3

OGM Operations 10
UM Tone (Fixed) 2*1
*1
Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions, the total amount of available resources indicated will be 2
less than the total resources of the installed card(s).
Reserved Resources
(40 x 1) + (10 x 0.5) + {(8-3) x 1.3} + (3 x 2.3) + (10 x 2) + 2
= 80.4
Free Resources
= 127 - 80.4
= 46.6
Note
This is an example for a PBX without any stacking Expansion Unit.
Expandable Resources with Expansion Unit

The following table shows the types of resources that are available when an Expansion Unit used with the
Main Unit.
Notice
When Expansion Units are used with the Main Unit, all IP-PTs and IP-CSs are registered to the Main Unit.
Type Resource Availability
Optional Service Card Physical Card for Legacy Trunks and Extensions ü
Virtual Card –*1
RMT Card –
DPH Card ü
DSP Card –
Terminal DPT/APT/SLT ü
PT-interface CS ü
PS ü
IP-CS/IP-PT/KX-UT Series SIP Phone/SIP-CS –*1
Doorphone ü
IP Softphone –*1
Activation Key Any Activation key –
*1
IP terminals, except for KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later only), are registered and controlled by the Main Unit.
Section 3
Information about the Activation Keys
This section provides information on activation keys,

including how to obtain activation keys.
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
3.1 Information about the Activation Keys

Activation keys are required to use IP trunks and IP telephones on a private IP network with the PBX. Also, to
upgrade the software to use enhanced features, the corresponding activation keys for that feature are required.
Some activation keys are provided by default, some are provided free for a limited period, and others are
provided separately as activation key files.

The PBX supports the following type and number of activation keys. The preinstalled activation keys on the
mother board are shown with "[ ]".
When the number of preinstalled activation keys is not enough for the desired configuration or when you wish
to use enhanced features, additional activation keys in the form of activation key files can be installed using
Web Maintenance Console.
Note
• Store the downloaded activation key files in your PC or a memory device. They can then be reinstalled
in an emergency situation.
• For information about how to obtain the additional activation keys, refer to "3.1.2 Activation Key Code
and Key Management System".
• For information about how to install the activation key files using Web Maintenance Console, refer to
"5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys".
IP Trunks
Model No. Activation Key Type Description Maximum IP Trunks
KX-NSM102 2 IP Trunk Allows the use of 2 IP trunks (H.

323/SIP).
323/SIP). 64 IP trunks
KX-NSM108 8 IP Trunk Allows the use of 8 IP trunks (H. (H.323/SIP)*1*2
323/SIP).
323/SIP).
*1
You need to set the number of installed activation keys to be used for H.323 trunks through system programming. By default, all
installed activation keys will be used for SIP trunks.
*2
The maximum number of IP trunks for H.323 is 32.
IP Telephone Capacity
Maximum IP
Model No. Activation Key Type Description
Telephones
KX-NSM201 1 IPSoftphone/IP PT Allows the use of 1 IP-PT/IP
softphone/KX-UT series SIP
phone.
KX-NSM205 5 IPSoftphone/IP PT Allows the use of 5 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT series SIP
phones. Total 128 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT
KX-NSM210 10 IPSoftphone/IP PT Allows the use of 10 IP-PTs/IP series SIP phones*1
phones.
KX-NSM220 20 IPSoftphone/IP PT Allows the use of 20 IP-PTs/IP
phones.
KX-NSM501 1 IP PT Allows the use of 1 IP-PT/
KX-UT series SIP phone.
KX-NSM505 5 IP PT Allows the use of 5 IP-PTs/ Total 128 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP phones. KX-UT series SIP
phones
KX-NSM510 10 IP PT Allows the use of 10 IP-PTs/ [4 IP-PTs/KX-UT
KX-UT series SIP phones. series SIP phones]*2
KX-NSM520 20 IP PT Allows the use of 20 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP phones.
KX-NSM701 1 SIP Extension Allows the use of 1 IP
Conferencing Phone/third party
SIP phone.
Conferencing Phones/third party
SIP phones. Total 128 IP
Conferencing Phones/
KX-NSM710 10 SIP Extension Allows the use of 10 IP third party SIP phones
SIP phones.
SIP phones.
*1
You can set how many IP softphones can be used with the installed activation keys through system programming. By default, only
IP softphones can be used with the installed activation keys.
*2
The capacity given in [square brackets] shows the number of activation keys preinstalled on the mother board.
IP-CS Channel Expansion

Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSE201 1 IP-CS channel Increases the number of
expansion communication channels from 4
to 8 for 1 IP-CS (KX-NS0154
only).
to 8 for 5 IP-CSs (KX-NS0154
only).
32
only).
only).
Note
• When performing channel expansion for IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), change the status of the IP-CS
port to OUS, then enable the channel expansion setting. (See "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main— Channel expansion" in the PC Programming
Manual.)
• To apply the channel expansion, the IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) must be reset by changing their port
status from OUS to INS. (See "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port
Property—V-IPCS—Main— Connection" in the PC Programming Manual.)
Feature Guide References for Related Features of Activation Keys

5.2.7 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
Networking
Maximum Activation Keys
Stand-alone One-look
System Network
KX-NSN001 One-look Network Allows the use of multi-site 16 activation
connections using One-look – keys*1
network feature.
KX-NSN002 QSIG Network Allows the use of enhanced
QSIG network features (NDSS, 1 activation key
Centralised Voice Mail, etc.).
*1
This activation key must be installed to each PBX in the One-look network.

One-look Network
• 4.2.1 One-look Networking Overview
QSIG Network
• 4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs
• 4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs
• 4.3.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
• 4.3.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
• 4.3.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Unified Messaging System (Features)

Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSU002 Two-way REC Control Allows a manager/administrator
to use the Automatic Two-way
1 activation key
Recording feature to record other
users.
KX-NSU003 Message Backup Allows the automatic backup of
1 activation key
messages.

Two-way REC Control
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
Message Backup
3.1.2.5 System Backup/Restore
Unified Messaging System (Unified Messaging Ports)

Maximum Unified
Messaging Ports
KX-NSU102 2 UM Port Allows the use of 2 Unified 24 Unified Messaging
Messaging ports. ports
KX-NSU104 4 UM Port Allows the use of 4 Unified [2 Unified Messaging
Messaging ports. ports]

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
Unified Messaging System (Mailbox)

Model No. Activation Key Type Description Maximum Mailboxes
KX-NSU201 UM/E-mail 1 User Allows the use of an e-mail

(IMAP4) client and e-mail
notification (voice) for 1 user.
KX-NSU205 UM/E-mail 5 Users Allows the use of an e-mail
notification (voice) for 5 users.
500 mailboxes
KX-NSU299 UM/E-mail All Users Allows the use of an e-mail
notification (voice) up to the
system’s limit.

• 3.2.1.28 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device
• 3.3.1 Integration with Microsoft Outlook
• 3.3.2 IMAP Integration
Unified Messaging System (Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer Users)

Model No. Activation Key Type Description Maximum Users
KX-NSU301 2way REC 1 User Allows the use of Two-way

Recording/Two-way Transfer for
1 user.
KX-NSU305 2way REC 5 Users Allows the use of Two-way
5 users.
Recording/Two-way Transfer for 384 users
10 users.
20 users.
KX-NSU399 2way REC All Users Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer up
to the system’s limit.

3.2.2.30 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer
Cellular Phone Extension

Maximum Cellular
Phone Extensions
KX-NSE101 1 Mobile User Allows the use of 1 cellular phone
extension.
KX-NSE105 5 Mobile Users Allows the use of 5 cellular phone
extensions. 384 cellular phone
KX-NSE110 10 Mobile Users Allows the use of 10 cellular extensions
phone extensions.
KX-NSE120 20 Mobile Users Allows the use of 20 cellular
phone extensions.

• 2.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
• 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
• 2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• 2.27.1 Cellular Phone Features—SUMMARY
• 4.3.6 Network ICD Group
• 4.3.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
Communication Assistant (CA) User

Activation Maximum Activation
Model No. Description
Key Type Keys
KX-NSA010 CA Thin Allows the use of CA Client in a thin-client
1
Client environment.
KX-NSA020 CSTA Allows the use of CSTA Multiplexer.
4
Multiplexer
Activation Maximum Activation

Model No. Description
Key Type Keys
KX-NSA201 CA Pro 1 Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 1 user.*1
user
KX-NSA205 CA Pro 5 Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 5 users.*1
users
users
users
KX-NSA249 CA Pro 128 Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 128
users users.*1
KX-NSA301 CA Allows the use of CA Client Supervisor for 1
Supervisor user. The same number as
the maximum number
KX-NSA401 CA Console Allows the use of CA Client Operator Console of allowable extensions
for 1 user.
KX-NSA901 CA Network Allows the use of CA Server network features
1 user for 1 user.
5 users for 5 users.
*1
A maximum of 384 CA users can be registered. However, CA Server is necessary to register more than 240 CA users.
CTI Licence
Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSF101 CTI interface Allows the use of the 3rd Party
1
CTI interface.

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Partner Licence
Activation keys for partner devices are stored in the PBX. Partner devices refer to the activation keys in the
PBX and determine whether they are enabled or disabled. A maximum number of 16 partner devices can refer
to the activation keys and operate simultaneously. However, limitations on partner devices connected through
devices connected directly to the PBX depend on the specifications of the directly connected devices. The
PBX does not limit these devices.
Note
• For information about purchasing licences, consult the partner entity or your dealer.
• To use devices by connecting them to CA Server, use a version of CA Server that corresponds to the
partner licence feature.
Model No. Activation Key Type Description Maximum Activation Keys
KX-NSB0001 Poltys C. Bridge Allows the use of the Poltys

16
Communication Bridge.
KX-NSB0101 Poltys CA RCS-Start 1 Allows the use of the Poltys CA
user RCS for 1 user.
KX-NSB0105 Poltys CA RCS-Start 5 Allows the use of the Poltys CA
users RCS for 5 users.
KX-NSB0110 Poltys CA RCS-Start Allows the use of the Poltys CA
10 users RCS for 10 users.
KX-NSB0149 Poltys CA RCS-Start Allows the use of the Poltys CA
128 users RCS for 128 users. Combined total for licences:
KX-NSB0201 Poltys CA RCS-Extend Allows the extension to use of the 350/system
1 user Poltys CA RCS for 1 user.
KX-NSB0205 Poltys CA RCS-Extend Allows the extension to use of the
5 users Poltys CA RCS for 5 users.
(Continued)
KX-NSB0004 Poltys CCAccounting Allows the use of Poltys

CCAccounting.
KX-NSB0005 Poltys CCAccounting Allows the use of Poltys
A.L. CCAccounting A.L.
KX-NSB0006 Poltys CCAcc. Allows the use of Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise Enterprise.
KX-NSB0007 Poltys CCAcc. Allows the use of Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise A.L. Enterprise A.L.
KX-NSB0008 Poltys CCView Allows the use of Poltys
CCView.
KX-NSB0009 Poltys CCView A.L. Allows the use of Poltys CCView
A.L. Combined total for licences:
KX-NSB0010 Poltys CCView add. Allows the use of Poltys CCView 350/system
PBX add. PBX.
KX-NSB0011 Poltys CCView add. Allows the use of Poltys CCView
PBX A.L. add. PBX A.L.
KX-NSB0012 Poltys Number notice Allows the use of Poltys Number
notice.
KX-NSB0013 Poltys Number notice Allows the use of Poltys Number
A.L. notice A.L.
KX-NSB0014 Poltys CCRecord SIP Allows the use of Poltys
(4 Ports) CCRecord SIP (4 Ports).
KX-NSB0016 Poltys CCRecord SIP Allows the use of Poltys
A.L. (4 Ports) CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 Ports).
(Continued)
KX-NSB0404 Poltys CCRecord Allows the use of Poltys

Analogue (4 users) CCRecord Analogue (4 users).
Analogue A.L. (4 CCRecord Analogue A.L. (4
users) users).
users) users).
Combined total for licences:
KX-NSB0512 Poltys CCRecord Allows the use of Poltys 350/system
users) users).
users) users).
users) users).
Digital (8 users) CCRecord Digital (8 users).
Digital A.L. (8 users) CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 users).
(Continued)

Digital A.L. (16 users) CCRecord Digital A.L. (16
users).
Digital A.L. (24 users) CCRecord Digital A.L. (24
users).
KX-NSB0801 Poltys CCRecord PRI Allows the use of Poltys
(1 Port) CCRecord PRI (1 Port).
(2 Ports) CCRecord PRI (2 Ports).
A.L. (1 Port) CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 Port).
A.L. (2 Ports) CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 Ports).
KX-NSB1001 Poltys CCView Allows the use of Poltys CCView
Supervisor Supervisor.
Combined total for licences:
KX-NSB1005 Poltys CCView Allows the use of Poltys CCView 350/system
Supervisor (5 user Supervisor (5 user Bundle).
Bundle)
Supervisor A.L. Supervisor A.L.
Supervisor A.L. (5 user Supervisor A.L. (5 user Bundle).
Bundle)
KX-NSB1201 Poltys CCView CRM Allows the use of Poltys CCView
P-up CRM P-up.
P-up (5 user Bundle) CRM P-up (5 user Bundle).
P-up A.L. CRM P-up A.L.
P-up A.L. (5 user CRM P-up A.L. (5 user Bundle).
Bundle)
(Continued)
KX-NSB1401 Poltys CCAgent Allows the use of Poltys

CCAgent.
KX-NSB1405 Poltys CCAgent (5 user Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent
Bundle) (5 user Bundle). Combined total for licences:
KX-NSB1501 Poltys CCAgent A.L. Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent 350/system
A.L.
KX-NSB1505 Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent
user Bundle) A.L. (5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB0002 PSDN Option-1 Allows the use of the option
feature of PSDN
KX-NSB0003 PSDN Option-2 16
(Panasonic System
Development Network).
System connection diagram for the integration with the Communication Bridge
[Without CA server]
CSTA Connection
PBX (1st party) Communication
Bridge
Max. users without CA Server: 240*1
[With CA server]
CSTA CSTA
PBX Connection CA Server Connection Communication
(3rd party) (1st party) Bridge
Max. users with CA server: 416*1

*1
Combined with number of CA Client users.

2.26.3 Integration with Communication Bridge
Call Centre Feature Enhancement

Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSF201 Call Centre Enhance Allows the use of queuing
information announcement, ICD
group monitor by ACD 1
supervisor, and creation of ACD
reports.
Preinstalled Activation Keys in the Mother Board

Preinstalled activation keys with no expiration date
The following type and number of activation keys are preinstalled on the mother board.
Activation Key Activated Features
CA Basic-Express No Limit
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch) 4 IP-PTs/KX-UT series SIP phones
UM Port (ch) 2 Unified Messaging ports
Example: Preinstalled Activation Keys in the Mother Board
Preinstalled activation keys for free trial

The following activation keys are preinstalled on the mother board for the 60-days free trial. They will expire
60 days after pressing the Activate Pre-installed Activation key button to begin the free trial.
One-look Network One-look networking feature

Two-way Recording Control Automatic Two-way Recording feature
Message Backup Automatic backup of messages
UM/E-mail (128 users) 128 mailboxes
Two-way Recording (30 users) 30 Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer users
Mobile Extension (30 users) 30 cellular phone extensions
CA PRO (128 users) 128 CA Pro users

CA Supervisor (1 user) 1 CA Supervisor user
CA Operator Console (1 user) 1 CA Console user
CA Thin Client Server Use CA in a thin-client environment
CTI interface 3rd Party CTI interface
CSTA Multiplexer Multiplexing for CSTA connections
Call Centre Feature Enhancement Built-in ACD Report, Announcement of waiting
number for queuing
Poltys C. Bridge Allows the use of the Poltys C. Bridge.
Poltys CA RCS-Start (5 users) Allows the use of the Poltys CA RCS*1.
Poltys CCAccounting
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
Poltys CCView
Poltys CCView add. PBX
Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 users) Allows the use of the Poltys features.
Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 users)
Poltys Number notice
Poltys CCAgent (5 users)
Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports)
*1
If you activate the Poltys CA RCS-Start (5 users) activation key, Poltys CA RCS-Extend (5users) will also be activated.
Activation Key Installation Example

The following illustration shows an example of when using 16 SIP trunks, 16 H.323 trunks, 40 IP-PTs, 20 IP
softphones, and 20 KX-UT series SIP phones on a private IP network using the mother board.
Example:
Desired Item:
40 IP-PTs
20 IP softphones
Required Activation Key:
2 of KX-NSM520s
KX-NSM220
Desired Item:
16 SIP trunks
KX-NSM116
V-SIPGW16 V-IPEXT32
Desired Item:
V-IPGW16 V-UTEXT32
16 H.323 trunks
KX-NSM116 Virtual Slots
Desired Item:
20 KX-UT series
SIP phones
KX-NSM720
Mother Board
3.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System
3.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System

To obtain additional activation keys, you need to purchase the appropriate activation key codes and access
the Key Management System. You can download the activation keys as an activation key file from the Key
Management System.
To download the activation keys, enter the MPR ID number shown on the back of the main unit, and activation
key number and registration ID provided on each activation key code.
For information about the type of activation key codes available, refer to "3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number
of Activation Keys".
For details about installing the downloaded activation key file(s) in the PBX memory using Web Maintenance
Console, refer to "5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys".
Note
• You can only download the activation key file once using the activation key number and registration ID
provided on the activation key code.
• Up to 8 activation keys can be downloaded as one activation key file.
• Up to 997 activation key files can be installed in the PBX memory.
• It is possible to send the activation key file to a specified e-mail address at the same time as
downloading it to a PC.
• Make sure to backup the downloaded activation key files on your PC.
• When the mother board has to be replaced due to a system malfunction, the MPR ID for the mother
board is no longer valid. In this case, you need a temporary activation key for maintenance purposes.
The temporary activation key can only be used for a limited time period, and can be downloaded from
the Key Management System in the same way as downloading activation key files.
3.1.3 Using CTI Applications

To use CTI applications with the PBX, KX-NSF101 (CTI interface) is required. One KX-NSF101 supports one
CTI application. However, Communication Assistant (CA) Server does not require KX-NSF101.
In the example below, one KX-NSF101 is required for using one CTI application.
Example 1
Single CSTA
PBX Connection CTI Server
In the example below, an activation key is not required to use CA Server.
Example 2
Single CSTA
PBX Connection CA Server
To use 2 or more CTI applications, the CSTA Multiplexer application is required, along with one KX-NSA020
(CSTA Multiplexer) for each CTI application. KX-NSF101 is included in KX-NSA020. Therefore, when
KX-NSA020 is installed, KX-NSF101 is not required.
In the example below, three KX-NSA020 are required for three CTI applications. (CA Server does not require
a KX-NSA020.)
Example 3
Panasonic
CSTA Multiplexer CTI Application Server
PBX
Single CSTA
Connection
CTI Application Server
CTI Application Server
CA Server
Note
• Up to 4 CTI application servers can be used at the same time when using a CSTA multiplexer.
• An Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection (KX-NSA020) is required for each CTI application.
• When a 3rd party CSTA multiplexer is used, a CTI interface activation key (KX-NSF101) is required
for the CSTA connection. (In this case, Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection [KX-NSA020] is
not required.)
• For details regarding KX-NSF101, refer to "CTI Licence" in "3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of
Activation Keys".
• For details regarding KX-NSA020, refer to "Communication Assistant (CA) User" in "3.1.1 Type and
Maximum Number of Activation Keys".
Section 4
Installation
This section describes the procedures to install the

PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation
site, installing the main unit and optional service cards,
and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided.
Further information on peripheral equipment installation
is included.
4.1.1 Before Installation
4.1 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the PBX and terminal
equipment.
Be sure to comply with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines.
Notice
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for injuries or property damage resulting from failures arising out of
improper installation or operation inconsistent with this documentation.
Safety Installation Instructions

WARNING
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
Installation Precautions
The PBX is suitable for mounting on a 19-inch rack, mounting on a wall, or placing on a desktop, and should
be installed in a location where it is accessible for inspections and maintenance.
To prevent malfunction, noise, or discolouration, follow the instructions below:
WARNING
Do not install the system in the following locations:
• Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong. Such activity may lead to the product
falling over and causing injury, or may impair the product’s performance.
• Areas with high amounts of dust. High amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and
impair the performance of the product.
CAUTION
• In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C)
• Areas where sulphuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.
• Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.
• Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at
least 5 cm to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.
• Locations where condensation can occur.
Notice
• On or near computers, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is
preferable not to install the system in the same room as the above equipment.)
• Within 1.8 m of radios and televisions. (Both the PBX and PTs should be at least 1.8 m away from such
devices.)
Do not perform the following:
• Do not block the openings of the PBX.
• Do not stack up the optional service cards.
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:
CAUTION
• Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers and other office equipment, as noise generated by such
equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.
• Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring
is completed.
• Trunks should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "4.2.11 Surge Protector
Installation".
Notice
• Use 1-pair telephone cables when connecting SLTs, data terminals, answering machines, computers,
etc.
• Mis-wiring may cause the PBX to operate improperly. Refer to "Section 4 Installation" when wiring
the system.
• If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and connect
it again, or turn off the PBX using the power switch, then turn it on again.
• Use twisted pair cable for trunk connection.
• To prevent signal noise from interfering with the performance of the product, do not run unshielded
telephone cables near AC power cables, computer cables, AC power sources, etc. When running
cables near other noise-generating devices or cables, use shielded telephone cables or shield the
telephone cables with metal tubing.
Preparing the Network Environment

Be sure to prepare your network’s environment for the installation of the PBX according to the intended PBX
networking configuration. For details about PBX network configurations, refer to "Section 8 Networking
Information".
4.2.1 Unpacking
4.2 Installation of the PBX
4.2.1 Unpacking
KX-NS500
Unpack the box and check the items below:
• Main unit
• CD-ROM(s)*1
• AC power cord*2
• Hook clip
• 19-inch rack attachment bracket x 2
• Screw x 6 (For 19 inch rack)
• Screw x 3 (For Wall Mounting)
• Washer x 3 (For Wall Mounting)
*1
The number of included CD-ROMs varies according to the country/area.
*2
The PBX with the suffix LA is supplied with 2 types of AC power cord. Please use whichever is appropriate for the country/area.
KX-NS520
Unpack the box and check the items below:
• Expansion unit
• CD-ROM(s)*1
• AC power cord*2
• Hook clip
• Ferrite core x 2
• 19-inch rack attachment bracket x 2
• Screw x 6 (For 19 inch rack)
• Screw x 3 (For Wall Mounting)
• Washer x 3 (For Wall Mounting)
*1
The number of included CD-ROMs varies according to the country/area.
*2
The PBX with the suffix LA is supplied with 2 types of AC power cord. Please use whichever is appropriate for the country/area.
4.2.2 Names and Locations

On the back side of the PBX, the location of the Power Switch and Battery Switch are different between
Type-A and Type-B.
KX-NS500 (Type-A)
Front Back/Inside
A CDE I J L K M N
B F G H O P Q RS T U
A. STATUS Indicator
B. PBX MODE indicator (Unused)
C. System Mode Switch
D. LAN Port
E. USB Port
F. LCOT Ports
G. DPT Port
H. SLT Ports
I. EXP-M slot
J. Trunk/Doorphone Free Slot
K. Extension Free Slot
L. Top Cover
M. Sub Board
N. Main Board
O. FG Terminal
P. AC Inlet
Q. Power Switch
R. External Battery
S. Battery Switch
T. FAN
U. MPR ID
KX-NS500 (Type-B)
Front Back/Inside
A CDE I J L K M N
B F G H O P Q RS T
A. STATUS Indicator
B. PBX MODE indicator (Unused)
C. System Mode Switch
D. LAN Port
E. USB Port
F. LCOT Ports
G. DPT Port
H. SLT Ports
I. EXP-M slot
J. Trunk/Doorphone Free Slot
K. Extension Free Slot
L. Top Cover
M. Sub Board
N. Main Board
O. FG Terminal
P. AC Inlet
Q. External Battery
R. Power Switch
S. FAN
T. MPR ID
KX-NS520 (Type-A)
Front Back/Inside
A B E G F H I
C D J K L MN O
A. STATUS Indicator
B. EXP-S Port
C. PFT Port
D. SLT Slot
E. Trunk/Doorphone Free Slot
F. Extension Free Slot
G. Top Cover
H. Sub Board
I. Main Board
J. FG Terminal
K. AC Inlet
L. Power Switch
M. External Battery
N. Battery Switch
O. FAN
KX-NS520 (Type-B)
Front Back/Inside
A B E G F H I
C D J K L MN
A. STATUS Indicator
B. EXP-S Port
C. PFT Port
D. SLT Slot
E. Trunk/Doorphone Free Slot
F. Extension Free Slot
G. Top Cover
H. Sub Board
I. Main Board
J. FG Terminal
K. AC Inlet
L. External Battery
M. Power Switch
N. FAN
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover

Opening the Top Cover
KX-NS500/KX-NS520
CAUTION
Before opening the top cover, the AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
1. Confirm that the power switch is turned off and disconnect the power cable.
Power Switch
Note
In order to turn off the PBX’s power, a system shutdown using Web Maintenance Console must first
be performed. For details, refer to "5.4 System Control—System Shutdown" in the PC Programming
Manual.
2. Turn the screws anticlockwise to loosen.
3. Slide the top cover then lift it off.
Closing the Top Cover

1. Place the top cover onto the PBX. Then slide the top cover until it closes properly.
2. Turn the screws clockwise to tighten.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, close the top cover and tighten the screws before operating the PBX.
4.2.4 Frame Earth Connection
4.2.4 Frame Earth Connection

KX-NS500/KX-NS520
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert an earthing wire (user-supplied).
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the earthing wire to earth.
Screw
Earthing wire
To earth
WARNING
• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to reduce the risk to the user of
electrocution or to protect the PBX from the bad effects of external noise in the case of a
lightning strike.
• The earthing wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes, but
it may not be enough to protect the PBX and to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. A
permanent connection between earth and the earth terminal of the PBX must be made.
CAUTION
For earthing wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor
must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
Notice
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards

CAUTION
• Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or
wearing an earthing strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
• When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off, and the
AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
• Disconnect the AC power source before servicing the equipment.
Note
Make sure the AC power cord is not connected to the AC inlet of the PBX.
Installing a DSP Card in a DSP Card Slot

1. Place the front end of the card under the hook, and then lower the rear end of the card so that the holes
of the card are aligned with the screw holes.
2. Insert the screws into the holes on the card, and tighten the screws to secure the card.
Screws
Removing a DSP Card Installed in the DSP Card Slot

1. Loosen and remove the screws.
Screws
2. Holding the rear end of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.
Installing an Optional Service Card in the Free Slot

In the Main Unit KX-NS500 and Expansion Unit KX-NS520, there are Free slots for Trunk/Doorphone cards
and Free slots for Extension cards. In Free slots for Trunk/Doorphone cards, you can install the following cards:
LCOT6, PRI23, PRI30/E1, BRI2, BRI4, and DPH2 card. In Free slots for Extension cards, you can install the
following cards: DHLC4, DLC8, DLC16, MCSLC8, MCSLC16. For details, refer to the description of each
optional service card in "4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards" and "4.7 The Doorphone Card".
KX-NS500 KX-NS520
Extension Card Slots Trunk/Doorphone Extension Card Slots Trunk/Doorphone

Card Slots Card Slots
1. Remove the dummy cover plate for the Free slot.

Cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
Dummy Cover Plate
Cut here.
Correct
Incorrect
Note
When removing the dummy cover plate, use plastic nippers. We do not recommend using a knife such
as a retractable utility knife.
2. Position the card in the open slot, making sure that the tabs on the both sides of the card fit into place.
Then, holding the card firmly in place, lower the rear end so that the holes of the card are aligned with the
screw holes.
3. Insert the spacers (A) into the holes on the card, and tighten the spacers to secure the card.
A
Note
When using an MCSLC8 or MCSLC16 card with a DLC16 card, install the DLC16 card in the bottom
slot.
4. Connect cables to appropriate ports of the card. For details about pin assignments, refer to the appropriate
section in "4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards".
Note
Make sure to connect cables after installing the card in the PBX, not before.
Removing Optional Service Card from the Free Slot

1. Loosen and remove the spacers (A).
A
Installing the EXP-M Card in the EXP-M Card slot

1. Remove the dummy cover plate for the EXP-M card.
Cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
Dummy Cover Plate
Cut here.
Correct
Incorrect
Note
When removing the dummy cover plate, use plastic nippers. We do not recommend using a knife such
as a retractable utility knife.
2. Position the card in the EXP-M card slot, making sure that the extension bolts are aligned with the holes
in the card and that the tabs on both sides of the card fit into place. Then, holding the card firmly in place,
lower the rear end so that the holes of the card are aligned with the extension bolts.
3. Insert the screws into the holes on the card, and tighten the screws to secure the card.
Screws
4. Connect cables to the appropriate ports of the card. For details about pin assignments, refer to the
appropriate section in "4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS5130)".
Note
Make sure to connect the cables after installing the card in the PBX, not before.
Removing the EXP-M Card from the EXP-M Card slot

1. Loosen and remove the screws.
Screws


Slot covers
Only remove the dummy cover plates when you are planning to install an optional service card. If you do not
install an optional service card, insert a slot cover included with the option service card, as shown in the
following procedure.
To insert a slot cover

1. With the clip-side of the slot cover on the left, insert the right edge of the cover in the slot.
Slot cover
2. Push the left edge in until it clicks securely into place.

To remove a slot cover

1. Remove the top cover.
Refer to "Opening the Top Cover" in "4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover".
2. From the inside, push the tab of the slot cover to the right and push out the left edge of the slot cover.
Tab

4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card

CAUTION
• When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, the power switch must be turned off.
• When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
• The SD Memory Card contains software and the customer data. Therefore, do not allow unauthorised
access to prevent data leakage.
• To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.
Notice
• Use only a Panasonic optional SD Memory Card.
• The SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the mother board before startup.
Note
• The maximum length of file names for files that are to be stored in the SD Memory Card is 60 characters.
Installing the SD Memory Card

1. Insert the SD Memory Card into the slot on the mother board.
Before Removing the SD Memory Card

When you want to back up Unified Messaging system data, a separate backup procedure is required.
For details about backing up Unified Messaging data, refer to "6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup" in the PC
Programming Manual.
Upgrading from the Installed SD Memory Card

To increase Voice Mail recording time, you can install a larger sized optional SD Memory Card.
For details about optional SD Memory Cards, refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory
S Card (KX-NS5135), SD Memory M Card (KX-NS5136)".
System Prompts
Optional SD Memory Cards contain system prompts for Unified Messaging. However, system prompts
language data stored in the SD Memory Card differ from those found in the optional SD Memory Cards.

For information about the system prompt languages in each SD Memory Card, refer to "9.1 System Prompt
Languages".
The system prompt language data you are using on the installed SD Memory Card must be backed up if
you want to continue using that SD Memory Card’s system prompt language data. After backing up the
system prompt language data, install the optional SD Memory Card, and then restore the backed up system
prompt language data to the new SD Memory Card.
This procedure is described below.
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.
(For details, refer to "Using a USB memory device" in "4.10 Connection of Peripherals".)
2. Back up the desired system prompts to the USB memory device.
(For details, refer to "6.9 Tool—UM Data Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.)
3. Shut down the PBX, and then turn the power switch off.
(For details about shutting down the PBX, refer to "5.4 System Control—System Shutdown" in the PC
Programming Manual.)
4. Remove the SD Memory Card, and then install an optional SD Memory Card.
(For details, refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory S Card (KX-NS5135), SD
Memory M Card (KX-NS5136)".)
5. Start the PBX as described in "System Initialisation Procedure" in "4.13 Starting the PBX".
6. Perform Easy Setup Wizard.
(For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".)
7. Restore the system prompts backed up in step 2. For details, refer to "6.10 Tool—UM Data Restore" in
the PC Programming Manual.

Removing the SD Memory Card

1. Remove the SD Memory Card installed in the slot on the mother board.

4.2.7 Types of Connectors

Connector Type Pin Number Used for
RJ45 • Mother board (KX-NS500)

– LAN Port
– Trunk I/F Port
– DPT I/F Port
– SLT I/F Port
1 8 • Mother Board (KX-NS520)
– PFT I/F Port
– SLT I/F Port
(Twisted pair cable) • EXP-M port
• EXP-S port
• LCOT6 (KX-NS5180)
• BRI2 (KX-NS5282)
• BRI4 (KX-NS5284)
• PRI23 (KX-NS5290)
• PRI30/E1 (KX-NS5290CE)
• DPH2 (KX-NS5162)
• DHLC4 (KX-NS5170)
• DLC8 (KX-NS5171)
• DLC16 (KX-NS5172)
• MCSLC8 (KX-NS5173)
• MCSLC16 (KX-NS5174)
Note
• Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors differ depending on the card. Refer to the "Pin Assignments"
section of each card in "Section 4 Installation".
Connecting KX-TDA0158 to the PBX

DLC8/16 card (RJ45) CS (RJ45)
Port No. Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
D1A 1 1 D1C
D2A 2 2 D2C
D1B 3 3 D1B
D1C 4 4 D1A
1 Master
D2C 5 5 D2A
D2B 6 6 D2B
D1D 7 7 D1D
D2D 8 8 D2D

DHLC4 card (RJ45)

Port No. Signal Name Pin No.
D1A 1
D2A 2
D1B 3 CS (RJ45)
TB 4 Pin No. Signal Name
RB 5 1 D1C
D2B 6 2 D2C
TA 7 3 D1B
RA 8 4 D1A
1 Master
D1C 1 5 D2A
D2C 2 6 D2B
D1D 3 7 D1D
TD 4 8 D2D
RD 5
D2D 6
TC 7
RC 8
Note
• For the DHLC4 card, the 4 ports on the PBX side must be in consecutive order.
• The no. 4 and 5 pins (Master) of the CS must be connected to a pair of pins on the DHLC/DLC card.
• When connecting multiple KX-TDA0158 CSs to a DHLC/DLC card, make sure that the no. 4 and 5 pins
(Master) of adjacent CSs are at least 1 pair of pins away on the card.
• CS connections must be made within the same DHLC/DLC card.
• When a wrong connection is made, satisfactory performance of the CS cannot be guaranteed.
Check the connection of CS and the PBX using the Web Maintenance Console. For information about
how to view CS information using the Web Maintenance Console, refer to "4.1.2 Status—Equipment
Status—CS Information" in the PC Programming Manual.
• KX-TDA0158 CS cannot be connected to DLC2 (installed by default).

4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core
4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core

A ferrite core must be attached to both sides when an RJ45 connector is connected to the EXP-M card and
the EXP-S card.
For the EXP-M/EXP-S Cards

Wrap the cable once around the ferrite core, then close the case of the ferrite core. Attach the ferrite core
5 cm away from the connector. The ferrite core is included with the Expansion Unit.
5 cm

4.2.9 19-inch Rack Mounting
4.2.9 19-inch Rack Mounting

WARNING
• Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an
injury.
• When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
(attachment bracket, screws) included with the PBX.
CAUTION
• When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, make sure that the installation of the unit does not cause
the temperature of the rack to exceed its limit.
• When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at
least 10 cm around the PBX’s fan.
damage.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack.
Notice
When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, confirm that the rated current listed on the PBX’s name plate
does not exceed the threshold current for the breaker.
1. Fix the attachment brackets to the left and right sides of the PBX with 3 screws on each side.
(Recommended torque: 0.8 N·m [8.2 kgf·cm] to 1.0 N·m [10.2 kgf·cm])® 1
2. Place the PBX in the 19-inch rack and fix both attachment brackets to the rack with the rack’s proprietary
mounting equipment. ® 2
Attachment Bracket
Screw

4.2.10 Wall Mounting

The PBX can be mounted on a concrete wall using the optional wall mounting kit.
WARNING
• Make sure that the wall that the unit will be attached to is strong enough to support
approximately 4 times the weight of the unit. If not, it is necessary for the wall to be reinforced.
• Only use the wall-mounting equipment (screws and washers) included with the PBX.
• Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an
injury.
• Proper earthing (connection to earth) is very important to reduce the risk to the user of
electrocution or to protect the PBX from the bad effects of external noise in the case of a
lightning strike. (See "4.2.4 Frame Earth Connection".)
CAUTION
• Make sure to install all necessary optional service cards in the PBX before performing the wall mounting
procedure. If it is necessary to install or remove a card, make sure to detach the PBX from the wall
before installing or removing the card.
• Do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the sides of
the PBX.
• Make sure that the surface behind the PBX is flat and free of obstacles, so that the openings on the
back of the PBX will not be blocked.
damage.
• When driving the screws into the wall, be careful to avoid touching any metal laths, wire laths or plates
in the wall.
• When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the wall.
Note
For details about dimensions and weight of the PBX, see "2.3.1 General Description".
Necessary Items
Included in the PBX
Screw A (For use in concrete) 3
Washer 3
Wall Mounting Procedures
CAUTION
Drive mounting screws into the wall. Be careful to avoid touching any metals laths, wire laths or metal
plates in the wall.

Mounting on a Wooden Wall

The included screws may be used when mounting the main unit on a wooden wall.
1. Measure the actual space as indicated below to mark the 3 screw positions on the wall.
200 mm
290 mm
100 mm
2. Install the screws and washers (included) to the wall.

Washer
Drive the screw

to this position.
Note
• As indicated above, do not tighten the screw fully.
• The pull-out strength of the installation area must be at least 294 N (30 kgf) per screw.
• Do not block the operations of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the
sides of the cabinet.
• Make sure that screw heads are the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screw perpendicular to the wall.
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

Mounting on a Concrete Wall

The included screws may be used when mounting the main unit on a concrete wall. User-supplied anchor
plugs are also necessary.
1. Measure the actual space as indicated below to mark the 3 screw positions on the wall.
200 mm
290 mm
100 mm
2. Drill holes in the wall as marked and fit the anchor plugs (not included) into the holes.
Hammer Anchor Plug
6.4 mm
29 mm
3. Fit the washers on the screws, and drive the screws into the anchor plugs.
Drive the screw

to this point.
Note
• As indicated above, do not tighten the screw fully.
• The pull-out strength of the installation area must be at least 294 N (30 kgf) per screw.
• Do not block the operations of the cabinet. Allow space of at least 20 cm above and 10 cm at the
sides of the cabinet.
• Make sure that screw heads are the same distance from the wall.
• Install the screw perpendicular to the wall.

4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

4.2.11 Surge Protector Installation

CAUTION
Performing surge protection is essential. Make sure to follow the instructions in this section.
Overview
A massive electrical surge can be caused if lightning strikes a telephone cable 10 m above ground, or if a
telephone line comes into contact with a power line. A surge protector is a device that is connected to a trunk
to prevent potentially dangerous electrical surges from entering the building via the trunk and damaging the
PBX and connected equipment.
To protect the system from electrical surges, we strongly recommend connecting the system to a surge
protector that meets the following specifications:
– Surge arrestor type: 3-electrode arrestor
– DC spark-over voltage: 230 V
– Maximum peak current: at least 10 kA
Additionally, proper earthing is very important for the protection of the system (refer to "4.2.4 Frame Earth
Connection").
Many countries/areas have regulations requiring surge protection. Be sure to comply with all applicable laws,
regulations, and guidelines.
Installation
Trunk Trunk Trunk
Surge
Protector
Terminal
Board
Extn. PBX
Extn.
SLT Frame
Earth
Earth
Extn.: Extension line

Outside Installation
(Main Building)
Surge Protector
Trunk
(Another Building)
Trunk
Terminal PBX Extn.

SLT
Board Surge
Extn.
Protector
Extn.
Extn.
SLT
Earth
Extn.: Extension Line
If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:
a. Install the extension wire underground.
b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.
Note
The surge protector for an extension is different from that for trunks.
Installation of an Earth Rod

Surge Protector
Trunk
Earthing
Wire PBX
(Underground)
Earth Rod

1. Connect the earth rod to the surge protector using an earthing wire with a cross-sectional area of at least
1.3 mm2.
2. Bury the earth rod near the protector. The earthing wire should be as short as possible.
3. The earthing wire should run straight to the earth rod. Do not run the wire around other objects.
4. Bury the earth rod at least 50 cm underground.
Note
• The above figures are recommendations only.
• The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

4.2.12 Backup Battery Connection

The backup batteries and Back-up Battery Cable provide a backup power supply to allow full use of the PBX
in the event of a power failure. In case of power failure, the backup batteries automatically maintain the power
to the PBX without interruption.
User-supplied Items
• Backup Batteries: VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) 12 V DC ´ 3
• Back-up Battery Cable: KX-A228
WARNING
• There is a danger of explosion if backup batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with
the same or equivalent type recommended by the battery manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Make sure that you do not short the backup batteries or cables.
CAUTION
• Make sure that the Back-up Battery Cable is securely fastened to both the backup batteries and the
PBX.
• Make sure that the polarities of the backup batteries and wiring are correct.
• Use the correct type of Back-up Battery Cable for the PSU.
Notice
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).
Note
• Type-B PBXs (refer to "4.2.2 Names and Locations") do not have a battery switch. The power switch
doubles as the battery switch.
• The recommended maximum capacity is 28 Ah, to maintain effective battery charge.
• Make sure that the type and capacity of the 3 backup batteries are identical.
• The Back-up Battery Cable should not be exposed to direct sunlight. Keep the Back-up Battery Cable
and the backup batteries away from heating appliances and fire. Place the backup batteries in a
ventilated place.
• For details about the backup batteries, refer to the manual for the batteries.
Backup Power Supply Duration

The length of time that backup batteries can power the PBX varies depending on the total load figure. For how
to calculate the load figure from the connected items, refer to "Load Figure Calculation".
Examples
Battery Capacity Backup Power Supply Duration*1
28 Ah 16 h
*1
The duration may vary depending on the conditions.
Connecting Backup Batteries (Type A)

1. Turn off the battery switch on the back side.

2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable to a set of 3 identical backup batteries.

Battery Connector Cover
Battery Connector
Back-up Battery Cable

Fuse
Battery Switch
Red Black
Backup Batteries (VRLA 12 V DC x 3)
Connecting Backup Batteries (Type B)

1. Turn off the power switch on the back side.
2. Connect the Back-up Battery Cable to a set of 3 identical backup batteries.
Battery Connector Cover
Battery Connector
Back-up Battery Cable

Fuse
Red Black
Backup Batteries (VRLA 12 V DC x 3)

4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3 The Mother Board and Expansion Cards
4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3.1.1 Mother Board in the Main Unit

Function
The mother board is the preinstalled processing board with activation keys for CA Basic-Express for unlimited
users, use of 4 IP-PT, and 2 Unified Messaging ports. The Virtual Cards (trunk/extension) can be installed in
Virtual Slots of the mother board and can be activated with the activation keys. Also, the mother board supports
LAN connection so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones, SIP phones) and PCs can be connected on a
private IP network.
Mountable Cards
• DSP Card (refer to "4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L Card
(KX-NS5112)")
• SD Memory Card (refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory S Card (KX-NS5135),
SD Memory M Card (KX-NS5136)")
• Remote Card (refer to "4.3.10 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)")
EXP-M Card Slot

DSP Card Slot RMT Card Slot LAN Port
SD Card Slot LED

System Mode Switch
LEDs
To LAN
Note
• The maximum length of the CAT 5/CAT 5e cables to be connected to the mother board is 100 m.
• For installing and removing the SD Memory Card, refer to "4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory
Card".
• For details about Virtual Slots, refer to "2.3.3 System Capacity".

4.3.1 Mother Board
• If the preinstalled activation keys on the mother board are not enough for the desired configuration,
you need to purchase activation key codes. For details about the activation keys, refer to
"3.1 Information about the Activation Keys".
• For details about connecting to a LAN, refer to "4.11 LAN Connection".
• For details about connecting peripherals, refer to "4.10 Connection of Peripherals".
• For details about System Mode Switch, refer to "4.13 Starting the PBX".
WARNING
A lithium battery is used in the mother board. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced
with the incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Pin Assignments
LAN Port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
No. Signal Name Input (I)/Output (O) Function
1 TPO+ O Transmit data+

2 TPO- O Transmit data-
3 TPI+ I Receive data+
4-5 Reserved – –
1 8
6 TPI- I Receive data-
LED Indications
Indication Colour Description
STATUS Green PBX status indication

• OFF: Power Off
• ON: Power On and running
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up/
Logging in
• Flashing (120 times per minute): PFMPR is
updating
Amber PBX status indication
• ON: Ready to shutdown
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Shutting down
Red PBX status indication
• ON: Alarm
The cause may be one of the following:
– Power was cut without performing the
shutdown procedure.
– No IP address(es) assigned for the DSP
card(s) by the DHCP server.
– Alarm for an optional service card.
• Flashing (240 times per minute): Initialise failed
PBX MODE Off • Not Used

4.3.1 Mother Board
10BASE-T/ LAN LINK Green Link status indication

100BASE-TX • OFF: Off-line
• ON: Linked normally
• Flashing: In communication

4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3.1.2 Mother Board in an Expansion Unit

Function
The mother board of an Expansion Unit is the pre-installed processing board with the EXP-S card, PFT card,
MCSLC16 card.
PFT4 + MCSLC16 Card EXP-S Card EXP-S Port
LED
To EXP-M
LED Indication
STATUS Off Power Off

Green On On Line
Green flashing (60 times per minute) Starting Up
Green flashing (120 times per minute) EXP-S card Programme error
Red On On Line with Alarm
Red flashing (60 times per minute) OUS (Out of service)

4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory S Card (KX-NS5135), SD Memory M Card (KX-NS5136)
4.3.2 SD Memory XS Card (KX-NS5134), SD Memory S Card

(KX-NS5135), SD Memory M Card (KX-NS5136)
Function
SD Memory XS, S, M If you install one of the SD Memory card, you can expand the number
Card: of SMDR data and Hotel Billing data.
SMDR data: 1000 (default), 40000 (with SD memory card)
Hotel Billing data: 1000 (Default), 10000 (with SD memory card)
Store ACD report data: 300,000
SD Memory XS: SD Memory with maximum of 40 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Memory S: SD Memory with maximum of 200 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Memory M: SD Memory with maximum of 400 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Card Slot
SD Card Mother Board
Accessories and User-supplied Items

Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): none
Note
For installing and removing the SD Memory Card, refer to "4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory
Card".
If you install one of the SD memory card, SVM features cease to function. Instead, UM features become
functional.

4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L Card (KX-NS5112)
4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L

Card (KX-NS5112)
Function
A DSP card is a digital signal processor card with DSP resources that can be used for VoIP calls, conferences,
the Unified Messaging feature, and the DISA/OGM feature. The DSP cards are compliant with ITU-T G.
729A and G.711 codec methods.
To operate the IP trunk and/or IP extension, one of the DSP S, DSP M or DSP L card must be installed.
Screws
DSP Card

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none
CAUTION
When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
Note
The DSP Resource Advisor can be used to calculate DSP resource usage easily. For details, refer to
"9.38.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor"
in the PC Programming Manual.
DSP Resource Information

The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows:
DSP Card Type Number of Resources
DSP S 63
DSP M 127

4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L Card (KX-NS5112)
DSP Card Type Number of Resources
DSP L 254
IP Address Information
Either 1 or 2 IP addresses must be assigned to each DSP card, depending on the type of DSP card. You can
assign IP addresses to the DSP cards during Easy Setup Wizard or through system programming.
For details about Easy Setup Wizard, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".
For details about assigning IP addresses through System Programming, refer to "Changing IP Address
Settings".
DSP Card Type Number of IP Addresses
DSP S/DSP M 1
DSP L 2

4.3.4 LCOT6 in KX-NS500 (installed by default)

Function
• 6 analogue trunk ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/DTMF).
• 6 MOH/External Pager port.
• 2 ports are power failure transfer (PFT) ports. (Port 1 and Port 2)
Note
• CO ports number, MOH ports number and External Pager ports number are as table below.
• You can select port Type "CO use (default)", "MOH or External Pager use" for each port by using WEB
Maintenance Console.
• Pair of an ODD port number and an EVEN port should be CO use or MOH/Pager use.
Example. If you select Port 5 as MOH (BGM 7), Port 6 should be MOH (Port 8) or Pager 6 as below.
To trunk
Port Type and Port Number

Port Type Port Number
CO (Default) Port 1 = CO 1
Port 2 = CO 2
Port 3 = CO 3
Port 4 = CO 4
Port 5 = CO 5
Port 6 = CO 6
MOH Port 1 = BGM 3
Port 2 = BGM 4
Port 3 = BGM 5
Port 4 = BGM 6
Port 5 = BGM 7
Port 6 = BGM 8

External Pager Port 1 = Pager 1

Port 2 = Pager 2
Port 3 = Pager 3
Port 4 = Pager 4
Port 5 = Pager 5
Port 6 = Pager 6
Port Type Setting by Web Maintenance Console
CO Use
CO Use
MOH or External Pager Use
Note
• For details about power failure transfer, refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections".
• To confirm the trunk connection, refer to "Confirming the Trunk Connection" in "4.13 Starting the
PBX".
Pin Assignment
For Trunk Use
No. Signal Name Function
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 TB Tip port 2
8 RB Ring port 2

For MOH/Pager Use

1 M/P1 A Music/Pager port 1

2 M/P2 A Music/Pager port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 M/P1 B Music/Pager port 2
8 M/P2 B Music/Pager port 2

4.3.5 DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default)
4.3.5 DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default)

Function
• 2 digital extension ports for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
To Extension
Pin Assignments
For DLC port
1 D1 A Data port 1 (Low)

2 D2 A Data port 1 (High)
3 D1 B Data port 2 (Low)
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 D2 B Data port 2 (High)
7 Reserved –
8 Reserved –

4.3.6 MCSLC16 in the Main Unit (installed by default)

Function
• 16 extension ports for SLT with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control, and 2 power failure transfer
(PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 90 V for Message Waiting Lamp control.
To Extension
Note
Pin Assignments
For MCSLC16 port 1-2 and port 3-4
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 TB Tip port 2
8 RB Ring port 2

For MCSLC16 port 5-8, port 9-12 and port 13-16

1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 TB Tip port 2
4 TC Tip port 3
5 RC Ring port 3
1 8
6 RB Ring port 2
7 TD Tip port 4
8 RD Ring port 4

4.3.7 EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default)
4.3.7 EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default)

Function
• EXP-S is pre-installed in the SPR card of KX-NS520 to use the unit as an Expansion Unit.
• By using this card, you can expand the Usage of Legacy Trunks and extensions.
To EXP-M Card
Notice
• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the ferrite core (included with the KX-NS520). Refer to
"4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
Pin Assignments
For EXP-S port
1 UHW+ Receive data+

2 UHW- Receive data-
3 REFCLK+ Reference CLK+
4 FHCLK+ Frame and System CLK+
5 FHCLK- Frame and System CLK-
1 8
6 REFCLK- Reference CLK-
7 DHW+ Transmit data+
8 DHW- Transmit data-

4.3.8 PFT in KX-NS520 (installed by default)

Function
When the power supply to the Expansion Unit fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current
connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Guide for
further information.
The detail information about this card, refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections".
Pin Assignments
For PFT port
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 TB Tip port 2
8 RB Ring port 2

To SLT3, SLT4
To SLT1, SLT2
Optional card KX-NS5180 Optional card KX-NS5180

No. Signal Name No. Signal Name
1 TA 1 TC
2 RA 2 RC
3 Reserved 3 Reserved
1 8 4 Reserved 1 8 4 Reserved
5 Reserved CO1 Tip 5 Reserved CO3 Tip
6 Reserved CO1 Ring 6 Reserved CO3 Ring
7 TB 7 TD
8 RB 8 RD
PFT1-2 PFT3-4
CO2 Tip CO4 Tip
CO2 Ring CO4 Ring
1 TA 1 TC
2 RA 2 RC
7 TB 7 TD
8 RB 8 RD

4.3.9 MCSLC16 in KX-NS520 (installed by default)

Function
• 16 extension ports for SLT with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control, and 4 power failure transfer
(PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 90 V for Message Waiting Lamp control.
To Extension
Note
Pin Assignments
For MCSLC port 1-2 and Port 3-4
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 TB Tip port 2
8 RB Ring port 2

For MCSLC port 5-8, port 9-12 and port 13-16

1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 TB Tip port 2
4 TC Tip port 3
5 RC Ring port 3
1 8
6 RB Ring port 2
7 TD Tip port 4
8 RD Ring port 4

4.3.10 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)
4.3.10 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)

Function
Analogue modem card for remote communication with the PBX. IUT-T V.90 support. To be mounted on the
mother board of the Main Unit.
Screw Screw
RMT Card
RMT Card Slot

Accessories (included): Screw x 2

4.4 Virtual Cards
4.4 Virtual Cards

Function
Virtual Cards are programs included with the mother board and that are treated as virtual cards by Web
Maintenance Console for convenience. Those programs can be activated with the appropriate activation key
(apart from V-IPCS4 cards, which do not require activation keys). By installing Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots
of the mother board using Web Maintenance Console, IP trunks, IP extensions, and IP-CSs can be used via
the mother board.
Virtual Card Description
Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card Virtual Card for 16-channel SIP trunk. Compliant with RFC
(V-SIPGW16) 3261, 3262, 3264, 3311, 3581, 3960 and 4028 protocols, and
ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec methods. Also supports T.38
protocol.
Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Virtual Card for 16-channel H.323 trunk. Compliant with VoIP
Card (V-IPGW16) H.323 V.5 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec
methods. Also supports T.38 protocol.
Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Virtual Card for 32 IP-PTs (KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500
Card (V-IPEXT32) series, and KX-NT265 [software version 2.00 or later only]).
Compliant with Panasonic proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.
729A, G.711 and G.722 codec methods.
Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Virtual Card for 32 third party SIP phones. Compliant with RFC
Card (V-SIPEXT32) 3261, 3264, 3310, 2327 and 4028 protocols, and ITU-T G.
729A, G.711 and G.722 codec methods. Also supports T.38
Protocol.
Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card Virtual Card for 4 IP-CSs. Compliant with ITU-T G.729A and
(V-IPCS4) G.711 codec methods.
Virtual UT Extension Card Virtual Card for 32 KX-UT series SIP phones. Compliant with
(V-UTEXT32) RFC 2327, 3261, 3264, 3310, 3515, 4028 and 4235 protocols,
and ITU-T G.729A, G.711 and G.722 codec methods. Also
supports WSD, CWMP and HTTP.

4.4 Virtual Cards
Example: Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots of the PBX
V-SIPEXT32
V-SIPGW16 V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16 V-UTEXT32 V-IPCS4
Virtual Slots
Mother Board

4.5.1 LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180)
4.5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards
4.5.1 LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180)

Function
6 analogue trunk ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/DTMF).
RJ45
To trunk

Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Copper wire
Note
PBX".
Pin Assignments
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 Reserved –
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
1 8
6 Reserved –
7 TB Tip port 2
8 RB Ring port 2

4.5.2 PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE)

Function
A combination card including:
• 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port (30B channels).
RJ45
To NT1/ Extension LED

User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Twisted pair cable
CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to
the U interface of the trunk directly.
• PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Notice
• The cable to connect to the ISDN Primary Rate Interface port of the PRI30/E1 card should be CAT 5
(Category 5) or higher.
Note
• You can select PRI30 use or E1 use by Web Maintenance Console.
– For switching from PRI30 use to E1 use:
Delete the PRI30 card first and select the E1 card in the "PBX Configuration ® Configuration ®
Slot" screen of the Web Maintenance Console. To restart the PBX, click Maintenance ® System
Control ® System Reset.
– For switching from E1 use to PRI30 use:
Delete the E1 card first and select the PRI30 card in the "PBX Configuration ® Configuration ®
Slot" screen of the Web Maintenance Console. To restart the PBX, click Maintenance ® System
Control ® System Reset.
• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the Public Switched
Telephone Network.
PBX".

Pin Assignments
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function
1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
1 8
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)
For Trunk Use Example:

Telephone Company
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function PRI/E1 Line
1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+) 1 TX(+)
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-) 2 TX(-)
3 Reserved – – 3
1 8 4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-) 4 RX(-)

5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+) 5 RX(+)
6-8 Reserved – – 6-8
For Extension/QSIG Use

Example:
No. Signal Name Level [V] Function Behind PBX
1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+) 1 RX(+)
2 RX- (-) Receive data (-) 2 RX(-)
3 Reserved – – 3
1 8 4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-) 4 TX(-)
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+) 5 TX(+)

6-8 Reserved – – 6-8
LED Indications
When you select PRI use
STATUS Green Off : All Ports OUS or Fault

On: INS (In Service)
Flashing (60 times per minute)*1: Master Clock (On)

When you select E1 use


On: At least one port is In Service
*1
This can be set to indicate "Normal (a port is in use)" through system settings. For details, consult your dealer.
Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PRI port is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 200 m

4.5.3 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
4.5.3 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)

Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
RJ45

CAUTION
• When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to
the U interface of the trunk directly.
• PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Notice
• The cable to connect to the ISDN Primary Rate Interface port of the PRI23 card should be CAT 5
(Category 5) or higher.
Note
• In some countries/areas, this optional service card must not be connected to the Public Switched
Telephone Network.
PBX".
Pin Assignments
1 RX+ (+) Receive data (+)

2 RX- (-) Receive data (-)
3 Reserved – –
4 TX- (-) Transmit data (-)
1 8
5 TX+ (+) Transmit data (+)

4.5.3 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
LED Indications

On: INS (In Service)
*1
This can be set to indicate "Normal (a port is in use)" through system settings. For details, consult your dealer.
Maximum Cabling Distance of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PRI23 cards is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 200 m

4.5.4 BRI2 Card (KX-NS5282)

Function
2-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
Note
RJ45
B A

CAUTION
When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U
interface of the trunk directly.
Note
• This optional service card has 100 W of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection,
the card must be placed at the end of the bus.
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
PBX".
Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition
A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

Pin Assignments
For Trunk Use
3 TX1 (+) Transmit data 1
4 RX1 (+) Receive data 1
5 RX2 (-) Receive data 2
1 8
6 TX2 (-) Transmit data 2
For Extension Use

1 8
LED Indications
LINE 2 Green Line status indication (LINE 1 to LINE 2):

LINE 1 Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.
LINE LED Pattern

Master
Layer 1 Layer 2 LED Pattern
Clock
OFF OFF OFF 1s
ON OFF OFF 1s
ON ON OFF 1s

Master
Clock
ON OFF ON 1s
ON ON ON 1s
Layer 1: ON (Synchronous)
Layer 2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)
Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)
Maximum Cabling Distance of ISDN DSU Connection

The maximum length of the cable that connects the DSU and the PBX is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 1000 m Point-to-Point
DSU
Maximum Cabling Distance of ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PBX and the TE is shown below:
Point-to-Point
CAT 5: Under 1000 m
TE


Function
4-port ISDN Basic Rate Interface card. EURO-ISDN/ETSI compliant.
RJ45
B A

CAUTION
When connecting this optional service card to the trunk, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U
interface of the trunk directly.
Note
• This optional service card has 100 W of terminal resistance. For use in point to multi-point connection,
the card must be placed at the end of the bus.
• This optional service card can be used for either trunk or extension connection, by setting the A/B
switch or using the connector with appropriate pin assignments.
PBX".
Switch Settings
Switch Type Usage and Status Definition
A/B Slide Select A (default) for trunk or B for extension use.

Pin Assignments
For Trunk Use
1 8
For Extension Use

1 8
LED Indications
LINE 4 Green Line status indication (LINE 1 to LINE 4):

LINE 3 Refer to "LINE LED Pattern" below for details.
LINE 2
LINE 1
LINE LED Pattern

Master
Clock
OFF OFF OFF 1s
ON OFF OFF 1s

Master
Clock
ON ON OFF 1s
ON OFF ON 1s
ON ON ON 1s
Layer 1: ON (Synchronous)
Layer 2: ON (Link established)/OFF (Link not established)
Master Clock: ON (Master)/OFF (Slave)
Maximum Cabling Distance of ISDN DSU Connection

The maximum length of the cable that connects the DSU and the PBX is shown below:
CAT 5: Under 1000 m Point-to-Point
DSU
Maximum Cabling Distance of ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the PBX and the TE is shown below:
Point-to-Point
CAT 5: Under 1000 m
TE

4.5.6 DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170)
4.5.6 DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170)

Function
4-port digital hybrid extension card with Caller ID (FSK) for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs.
RJ45
To Extension

Pin Assignments
1 D1A Data port 1 (low)

2 D2A Data port 1 (High)
3 D1B Data port 2 (low)
4 TB Tip port 2
5 RB Ring port 2
1 8
6 D2B Data port 2 (High)
7 TA Tip port 1
8 RA Ring port 1

4.5.7 DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171)
4.5.7 DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171)

Function
8-port digital extension card for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
RJ45
To Extension

Pin Assignments
1 D1A Data port 1 (Low)

3 D1B Data port 2 (Low)
4 D1C Data port 3 (Low)
5 D2C Data port 3 (High)
1 8
7 D1D Data port 4 (Low)
8 D2D Data port 4 (High)

4.5.8 DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172)
4.5.8 DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172)

Function
16-port digital extension card for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
RJ45
To Extension

Pin Assignments
1 D1A Data port 1 (Low)

3 D1B Data port 2 (Low)
4 D1C Data port 3 (Low)
5 D2C Data port 3 (High)
1 8
7 D1D Data port 4 (Low)
8 D2D Data port 4 (High)

4.5.9 MCSLC8 Card (KX-NS5173)

Function
8-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
RJ45
To Extension

Pin Assignments
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 TB Tip port 2
4 TC Tip port 3
5 RC Ring port 3
1 8
6 RB Ring port 2
7 TD Tip port 4
8 RD Ring port 4


Function
16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
RJ45
To Extension

Pin Assignments
1 TA Tip port 1
2 RA Ring port 1
3 TB Tip port 2
4 TC Tip port 3
5 RC Ring port 3
1 8
6 RB Ring port 2
7 TD Tip port 4
8 RD Ring port 4

4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS5130)
4.6 Expansion Card

Function
A stacking card to be installed in the Main Unit. Up to 3 expansion units can be connected.
To EXP-S Card

Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, CAT 5e cable (maximum 3 m)
CAUTION
When installing or removing this card, the power switch must be turned off.
Notice
• When connecting the RJ45 connector, attach the ferrite core (included with the KX-NS520). Refer to
"4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core".
Note
Status LED on Expansion Units indicates the connection status between EXP-M in the Main Unit and
EXP-S in Expansion Units. For more detail, refer to "LED Indications" in "4.3.1 Mother Board".
Pin Assignments
1 UHW+ Receive data +

2 UHW- Receive data -
3 REFCLK+ Reference CLK +
4 FHCLK+ Frame and System CLK +
5 FHCLK- Frame and System CLK -
1 8
6 REFCLK- Reference CLK -
7 DHW+ Transmit data +
8 DHW- Transmit data -

Maximum Cabling Length of Extension Connection

The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the Main Unit to the Expansion Unit is shown below:
Under 3 m

4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)
4.7 The Doorphone Card

Function
A doorphone card for 2 doorphone, 2 door opener, and 2 external sensor.
A Doorphone Card is installed in Trunk slot.
To doorphone/
external sensor To door opener

User-supplied (not included): Copper wire
Note
For details about connecting to a doorphone and/or door opener, refer to "4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone,
Door Opener, and/or External Sensor".
PIN Assignment
PIN Assignment for Doorphone Port
1 DP1 Doorphone 1 transmit

2 COM1 Doorphone 1 receive
3 SENS1a Sensor 1
4 DP2 Doorphone 2 transmit
5 COM2 Doorphone 2 receive
1 8
6 SENS1b Sensor 1 common
7 SENS2a Sensor 2
8 SENS2b Sensor 2 common

PIN Assignment for Door opener Port

1 OP1a Door opener 1 (Relay 1)

2 OP1b Door opener 1 com (Relay 1 com)
3 Reserved -
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
1 8
6 Reserved -
7 OP2a Door opener 2 (Relay 2)
8 OP2b Door opener 2 com (Relay 2 com)
External Sensor
Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must be grounded through the DPH2 card
as indicated in the diagram below. A pair of "sensor" and "common" lines are connected to the DPH2 card for
each external sensor. The PBX detects input from the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Connection Diagram
PBX
DOORPHONE
+3.3V
External Sensor
+3.3V
33
10K sensor
I/O
4.7K 33
common
4.7K
Door Opener
Current Limit: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum

4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)
4.8 Connection of Extensions
4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring

(Twisted Cable)
Cable Maximum Distance PT-interface CS
ø 0.4 mm: 222 m
ø 0.5 mm: 347 m
ø 0.6 mm: 500 m
CAT 5: 347 m
Cable Maximum Distance DPT

ø 0.4 mm: 500 m
ø 0.5 mm: 720 m
ø 0.6 mm: 830 m
CAT 5: 720 m
APT and DSS Console

Cable Maximum Distance
ø 0.4 mm: 140 m
ø 0.5 mm: 229 m
ø 0.6 mm: 360 m
CAT 5: 229 m

ø 0.4 mm: 698 m
ø 0.5 mm: 1128 m SLT
ø 0.6 mm: 1798 m
CAT 5: 1128 m
Notice
The maximum cabling distance may vary depending on the conditions.
PT-interface DSS
DPT APT SLT
CS Console
DHLC4 Card ü ü ü ü ü
MCSLC8, MCSLC16
ü
cards
DLC2, DLC8, DLC16
ü ü
cards
"ü" indicates that the extension card supports the terminal.

4.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.
Note
In addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallel
with an APT or a DPT.
With APT
For parallel connection, eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode must be disabled for that port through system
programming. Refer to "2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone" and "5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration" in the
Feature Guide for further information.
To DHLC4 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins "T" and "R".
Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",
and "D2".
APT SLT
With DPT
Parallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to
"2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone" and "5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for further
information.

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

To DHLC4 card
Modular
T-Adaptor


Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".
DPT SLT
Using an EXtra Device Port

Example: With KX-DT300 Series DPT*1
To DHLC4 card

Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".
DPT SLT
TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL

/ PABX
To DHLC4 card
To SLT
*1
Available for KX-DT300 Series DPT (except KX-DT321), KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665) and KX-DT500 Series DPT
(except KX-DT521).

4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connected
to a DHLC4 card, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.
Note
• Both DPTs must be KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600 series DPTs (except KX-T7640). Note that the
KX-T7667 can only be connected as a slave DPT.
• Bluetooth® Modules or USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection.
• Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.
• If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to
"2.11.10 Parallelled Telephone" and "5.2.6 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Guide for
further information.
Example: With KX-DT300 Series DPT

Using a Modular T-Adaptor
To DLC2/DLC8/
DLC16 card
Modular
To DHLC4 card T-Adaptor
(for connection of SLT) Connect pins "T" and "R".

Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".
SLT
Master DPT Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
TO TEL ø 0.4 mm: 30 m / PABX
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC2/DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)

Using an EXtra Device Port*1
To DLC2/DLC8/
DLC16 card
To DHLC4 card Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
(for connection of SLT) "D1" and "D2". Connect pins "T" and "R".

Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT Slave DPT SLT
Back View of DPTs

TO MAIN UNIT
TO TEL ø 0.4 mm: 30 m / PABX
ø 0.5 mm: 50 m
ø 0.6 mm: 60 m
CAT 5: 50 m

TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL
/ PABX
To DLC2/DLC8/DLC16 card To SLT
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)
*1
Connecting with a SLT is not available for KX-DT321, KX-T7665 and KX-DT521.

4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor
4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/

or External Sensor
The Main Unit and Expansion Units each support 2 doorphones, 2 door openers and 2 sensors.
Note
Doorphones, door openers, and external sensors are user-supplied.
Maximum Cabling Distance

ø 0.42 mm: 70 m Doorphone
ø 0.5 mm: 113 m
ø 0.6 mm: 180 m
CAT 5: 113 m
Door Opener
External Sensor
Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865/KX-T7765)

Note
The illustrations shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-T30865.
1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.
ic
ason
Pan
Screw

4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor
Note for KX-T7765 Users

When loosening/tightening the screw, do not scratch the cabinet wall with the driver shaft.
Cabinet Wall
2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.
Screw
To DPH2 Card
Note
Two kinds of screws are included with the doorphone. Please choose the appropriate kind for your wall
type.
: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall
: when you wish to install the doorphone directly onto the wall
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the back cover.
To DPH2 Card
4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.
Connection
Refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)" for pin assignments.

4.10 Connection of Peripherals

Maximum Distance Maximum Distance
100 m 100 m
Switching Hub
PC Maximum Distance
5m
USB Memory
Device Cable Maximum Distance USB Port
ø 0.4 mm: 10 m
ø 0.5 mm: 10 m
ø 0.6 mm: 10 m LAN Port
CAT 5/
CAT 5e: 10 m
BGM Cable Maximum Distance

Music on Hold
ø 0.4 mm: 10 m
ø 0.5 mm: 10 m
ø 0.6 mm: 10 m
CAT 5/
CAT 5e: 10 m
Pager:
Amplifier/Speaker
BGM/MOH
The PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Up to 6 external music sources (e.g., user-supplied
radio) can be connected to the PBX.
CAUTION
The MOH port is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device, via a Line
Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.
Notice
• Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug. Otherwise, sound
may only be heard intermittently.
• When the PBX and external music source are not connected to the same earth, hum noise may be
induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.
Pager
A paging device (user-supplied) can be connected to the PBX.
CAUTION
The Pager port is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device, via a Line
Isolation Unit with a Telecommunications Compliance Label.

USB Interface for USB Memory Device

The PBX is equipped with a USB 2.0 interface. This interface provides communication between the PBX and
user-supplied devices such as a USB memory device.
Using a USB memory device

A USB memory device can be used to backup and restore the system data of the PBX.
The PBX supports USB memory devices that meet the following specifications:
• File system: FAT
• Maximum capacity: 32 GB
• Maximum current: 500 mA
For details about backing up and restoring using a USB memory device, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data
Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
Do not use a USB hub when connecting a USB memory device to the PBX.

4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit
4.11 LAN Connection

Connecting the Main Unit to the LAN
The PBX is equipped with a LAN port for connecting to a LAN so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones,
SIP phones), IP-CSs, PCs and a CTI Server can be connected on a private IP network. When the PBX is
connected to the LAN for the first time, you must assign IP addressing information to the PBX. See
"5.4 Programming the PBX" for instructions.
IP Softphone,
CA Client PC CTI Server PC
LAN Port
Switching Hub
Ethernet Cable
IP-PT
IP-CS SIP-CS Trunk

Adaptor
SIP Phone
Connection for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Switching Hub PBX (LAN Port)
Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
TX+ 1 1 RX+
TX- 2 2 RX-
RX+ 3 3 TX+
RX- 6 6 TX-
Note
• Use an Ethernet cable with an RJ45 connector for connection to a switching hub. The cable should be
a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced Category 5).
• Make sure that all CAT 5/CAT 5e cables in use are not over 100 m in length.
• Make sure to set the port of the switching hub that connects to the card to operate under "Auto
Negotiation" mode.
• Make sure to create a spanning tree for LAN connection in order to prevent loops from occurring in a
multi-bridged environment. Otherwise, some packets may circulate for long periods of time and
eventually PBX performance system may degrade.

• The CTI server can be used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI.
CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol. The operating system of the PC or CTI
server required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer
to the manual for your CTI application software.
• When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the PBX is connected to a layer 2 switch
that is IEEE 802.1Q compliant, and that is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of the switching
hub to which the PBX is connected must be set to "Untagged". Consult your network administrator for
details.

4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones

When an IP telephone is connected to the LAN and power is supplied for the first time, you will be prompted
to set network parameters. The network parameters must be set for the IP telephone before it can be used.
Refer to "5.7 Assigning Networking Information to IP Telephones" for instructions.
Connecting an IP Telephone to a Switching Hub

When connecting an IP telephone to the LAN, connect it to a switching hub.
Note
• Use an Ethernet straight cable with an RJ45 connector to connect the IP telephone to a switching hub.
The cable should be a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced
Category 5).
• When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the switching hub to be connected is
IEEE 802.1Q compliant and is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of a switching hub that the
IP telephone is connected to must be set to "Trunk" port, to allow VLAN tagging. Consult your network
administrator for details.
• Since an IP softphone is installed and operates on a PC, the PC must be connected to the LAN to use
the IP softphone on the network.
The diagram below is for connecting an IP-PT to a switching hub. For SIP phones, refer to the documentation
of your SIP phone.
Example: KX-NT346
To a Switching Hub
Ethernet Straight Cable

Connecting an AC Adaptor to an IP Telephone

IP-PTs and some SIP phones comply with the IEEE 802.3af Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) standard. If PoE is
available on your network, these IP telephones can receive the necessary power supply from the network
through the network cable. In this case, no AC adaptor is needed for the IP telephones.
However, if PoE is not available, you will need to connect an AC adaptor to the IP telephone.
Note
Use only the specified type of AC adaptor for each IP telephone. For details, refer to the documentation of
your IP telephone.
Example: KX-NT346
To Wall Socket
AC Adaptor Cord
Connecting a PC to an IP Telephone
You can connect a PC to some IP telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series) using the IP telephone’s secondary
port. In this case, only a single port from the LAN’s network interface (switching hub) is required to connect
both the IP telephone and PC to the LAN.
Note
• Use an Ethernet straight cable with an RJ45 connector to connect a PC to the IP telephone. The cable
should be a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced Category
5).
• Only a PC can be connected to the secondary port of an IP telephone. Other IP telephones, including
IP-PTs, or network devices such as routers or switching hubs, cannot be connected.
• The secondary port does not support PoE for connected devices.
• In cases where a PC is connected to the secondary port, if the IP telephone connection to the PBX is
disconnected or reset, LAN communication to the PC will also be disrupted.
• Generally, it is recommended that you connect no more than one PC to the secondary port of each IP
telephone.

Example: KX-NT346
To a PC
Ethernet Straight Cable

4.12 Power Failure Connections

When the power supply to the PBX and/or Expansion Unit fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from
the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "5.6.2 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature
Guide for further information.
The table below shows PFT support Cards and PFT support ports.
PFT support Cards PFT support ports
KX-NS500 Pre-installed LCOT6 Port 1-2

Pre-installed MCSLC16 Port 1-2
KX-NS520 Optional card KX-NS5180 Port 1-4
Pre-installed MCSLC16 Port 1-4
The table below shows the maximum number of PFT connections for each stacking configurations.
KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500 KX-NS500
(Pre-installed) (Maximum) w/1 KX-NS520 w/2 KX-NS520s w/3 KX-NS520s
2 2 6 10 14
Note
A trunk conversation established during power failure can be maintained even when the power returns and
the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection.
Power Failure Connection

In the case of KX-NS500
In the event of a power failure, a specific SLT port is automatically supplied power through the CO port. The
PFT ports are the port 1-2 (on pre-installed MCSLC16) and port 1-2 (on pre-installed LCOT6).
To CO1, CO2
To SLT1, SLT2

In the case of KX-NS520

In the event of a power failure, a specific SLT port is automatically supplied power through the CO port. The
PFT ports are the port 1-4 (on pre-installed MCSLC16) and port 1-4 (on Optional LCOT6 card) through PFT
card.
To SLT3, SLT4
To SLT1, SLT2
Optional card KX-NS5180 Optional card KX-NS5180

1 TA 1 TC
2 RA 2 RC
5 Reserved CO1 Tip 5 Reserved CO3 Tip
6 Reserved CO1 Ring 6 Reserved CO3 Ring
7 TB 7 TD
8 RB 8 RD
PFT1-2 PFT3-4
CO2 Tip CO4 Tip
CO2 Ring CO4 Ring
1 TA 1 TC
2 RA 2 RC
7 TB 7 TD
8 RB 8 RD

4.13 Starting the PBX

WARNING
Make sure that the AC outlet is properly earthed, then securely connect the 3-pin AC plug including
the earthed pin.
CAUTION
• Use only the AC power cord included with the PBX.
• Once you have started the PBX, if you unplug the PBX, do not initialise it again as described in "System
Initialisation Procedure". Otherwise, your programmed data will be cleared. To restart the PBX, refer
to "7.1.5 Restarting the PBX".
• The plug of power supply cordset is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is
located near the equipment and is easily accessible.
Installing the Hook Clip for the AC Power Cord

1. Insert the hook clip into the hook clip hole.
Note
Use only the hook clip included with the PBX.

Connecting the AC Power Cord

1. Plug the AC power cord into the PBX and pass the cord through the hook clip as indicated. Push the hook
clip in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch or pinch the AC power cord.
To UPS
2. When not using a UPS:

Plug the other end of the cord into an AC outlet.
When using a UPS:
Plug the other end of the cord into the outlet of the UPS.
System Initialisation Procedure

1. Slide the System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
STATUS Indicator System Mode Switch
2. Turn on the power switch of the PBX. The STATUS indicator will flash green.

3. While the STATUS indicator is flashing green, slide the System Mode Switch back to the "NORMAL"
position. Depending on the configuration, initialisation takes about 2.5 minutes. If successfully executed,
the STATUS indicator will stop flashing and remain lit up.
Note
When a DSP card is installed and a DHCP server is not connected, installed DSP card cannot acquire
an IP address, and the STATUS indicator will turn red.
All data, except for system prompts and activation key files, will be erased. Data that is erased includes Unified
Messaging data, call logs, etc. The settings for the PBX as well as all optional service cards will be initialised
to their default values.
Note
• After the PBX is initialised, you can restore system data to the PBX that has been backed up earlier.
For details about backing up and restoring system data, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data Backup",
"7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC" and "7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX" in
• After the PBX is initialised, you must set up the mandatory settings required for the PBX with Easy
Setup Wizard. For details refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" and "5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard".
• When a UPS is connected, make sure it is started as instructed in the documentation for the UPS.
Confirming the Trunk Connection

After the PBX starts up, programme the PBX and connect trunks to the PBX.
To confirm that the trunks are successfully connected, dial [ ] [3] [7] + trunk number (3 digits) on an IP
telephone, or press the IP/DPT/APT telephone’s S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the trunk is available
and connected.

Section 5
Programming Information
This section describes the installation procedure,

structure, and functions of the Web Maintenance
Console for programming IP telephones and the PBX.
Further information on programming the PBX for use
with SIP trunks and a VoIP network is included.

5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console
5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console

Web Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX.
You can programme and control the PBX over an IP network using Web Maintenance Console.
This section describes programming basic items using Web Maintenance Console.
Web Maintenance Console Features

Login Status Menu Buttons
Note
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.

5.2 PC Connection
5.2 PC Connection
The Main Unit has a LAN port for PC to programme PBX. A default IP address is assigned to each port. A PC
can be connected through LAN connection.
Port Default IP Address Default Subnet Mask
LAN Port 192.168.0.101

255.255.255.0
MNT Port *1
223.0.0.1
*1
Use USB to LAN adaptor to use the USB port of the PBX as an MNT port.
Connection via LAN
LAN
PC LAN Port
Switching Hub
Note
For details about connecting a switching hub to the PBX, refer to "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
Connection via Virtual Private Network (VPN)

PC
Router
VPN
LAN
LAN Port
Router Switching Hub
Notice
To access the PBX via VPN, the PC must be in the same VPN.

5.2 PC Connection
Note
Unit".
Connection via Internet

PC
Router
Internet
LAN
LAN Port
Router Switching Hub
CAUTION
It is strongly recommended to use SSL encrypted communication when the PC is accessing the PBX via
the Internet. To use SSL encryption, routers must have a port set up for https communication.
Notice
To access the PBX via the internet, routers must have static NAT/NAPT settings (Port forwarding) enabled.
Note
Unit".
Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)
PC Analogue MODEM
Analogue Line
Network
RMT Card (KX-TDA0196) is Installed

in KX-NS500.
To connect a PC to the Main Unit

1. Start Off-line WebMC launcher.
2. Click the Connect-Online Mode(C) button.
3. Select Modem tab.
4. Set following.
– Dial Number
– Dial Type
– Port

5.2 PC Connection
– Baud Rate (bps)

– Flow Control
– Command
5. Enter Password.
6. Click Connect button.
Connection via PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290), PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE),

BRI2 Card (KX-NS5282), or BRI4 Card (KX-NS5284)
Note
The PRI30/E1 card is used as an example in the following illustration.
PC ISDN MODEM
ISDN Line
Network
PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE) is installed

in KX-NS500
To connect a PC to the Main Unit

1. Start Off-line WebMC launcher.
2. Click the Connect-Online Mode(C) button.
3. Select the ISDN Remote tab.
4. In Telephone Number, enter a telephone number.
5. In Password, enter the password.
6. Click the Connect button.
MNT Port
By connecting a USB-LAN adaptor to the USB port you can access the PBX over a LAN.
Notice
• When connecting the PC to the MNT port, if the PC is set to obtain the IP address automatically, the
IP address of the PC will be set to an appropriate IP address to establish a connection to the PBX.
• Only recommended USB-LAN adaptors can be used. For information on recommended products,
consult you dealer.

5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console

System Requirements
For the system requirements of the PC (operating system, hardware specifications, supported browsers etc.),
refer to "1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console" in the PC Programming Manual.
Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm).
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the
derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Password Security
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
programme the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, refer to "1.1.3 Entering Characters" in the PC Programming Manual.
Connecting to Web Maintenance Console

1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
For details, refer to "Connection via LAN", "Connection via Virtual Private Network (VPN)" and
"4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit".
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection. For details, refer to "Connection via Internet" and "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
• Connect the PBX to a PC through analogue remote (RMT card) or ISDN remote. For detail, refer to
"5.5.2 PC Programming" in the Feature Guide.

2. Access Web Maintenance Console:

LAN or VPN Connection:
Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101
Note
• The default subnet mask for the LAN port is 255.255.255.0.
MNT Port Connection:

Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as shown:
– 223.0.0.1
or
– http://kx-ns500.
Note
• If entering "http://kx-ns500.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.
• The default subnet mask for the MNT port is 255.255.255.0.
• If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.
Internet Connection (SSL Connection):

When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the internet, the use of SSL is strongly
recommended. When using an SSL encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the address
to enter to connect to the PBX using an SSL encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using SSL, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Note
The IP address and Web Maintenance Console port number for the PBX can be changed from their
default values. If settings for the LAN port’s IP address has been forgotten, refer to the PT Programming
[991] in PT Programming Manual.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. Log in with the Installer level account name and
the default Installer level account password to launch the Easy Setup Wizard. For details about the Easy
Setup Wizard, see "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".

Using Web Maintenance Console in Off-line Mode

You can connect a PC to the PBX to programme the PBX using Web Maintenance Console (On-line mode),
or you can programme the PBX without connecting the PC to the PBX (Off-line mode).
Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance Console, which you
install on your PC. The changes made during Off-line mode are saved as local data on the PC, and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install the Web Maintenance Console for Off-line mode programming.
Installation
Note
• Be sure to install the latest version of KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console.
• Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be
installed on the PC:
– Microsoft® .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Centre.
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista® Business, Windows® 7, Windows
8, Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 Professional, you must be logged in as a user
in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Note
For information about programming the PBX in Off-line mode, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
Converting KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE series System Data for Use

with the KX-NS500
System data from a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE series PBX can be converted for use with the
KX-NS500 to ensure a seamless transition to the new system.
In this section, we use "Maintenance Console" for the following Maintenance Console.
– Unified Maintenance Console for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
– Maintenance Console for KX-TEx824
1. Connect a PC to a KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-TE series PBX, and then start the Maintenance Console.
For details about connecting a PC to a PBX or for details about the Maintenance Console, refer to the
appropriate documentation.
2. In the Maintenance Console, save the PBX's system data file DSYS or xxxxxxx.kea*1 to the PC.*2
For details about saving the system data file to the PC, refer to the appropriate documentation.
3. Start Web Maintenance Console for the KX-NS500 in Off-line mode.
4. In the Programme Launcher, click Database Converter.
5. In Select Original File Name, select the system file (DSYS or xxxxxxx.kea*1) you saved in step 2 as the file
to convert.
6. Select WebMC Language and click "Next".
7. An image of converting the file to the KX-NS500 is displayed on the screen. The system data will be
converted and a system data file for the KX-NS500 (DFSYS) is created. It will complete within one minute.
8. After conversion is complete, you can click Save on the Result of Converting screen and save the results
file to your PC.
9. In the "Select Next Step" screen, you can select the action from the followings.
1. "Finish of Database Conversion"
2. "Continue Online Programming (Connect - Online Mode)

3. "Continue Offline Programming (Open - Offline Mode)

*1
The PBX's system data file
• KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: DSYS
• KX-TEx824: xxxxxx.kea
*2
The software version for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 and KX-TEx824 series PBXs must meet the latest version requirements shown in
the Data Converter tool. If the requirements are not met, you must use the Maintenance Console to upgrade the version to the latest
version, and then save the DSYS or xxxx.kea file.
Notice
• The following numbering plan settings are brought over during data conversion:
Feature Numbers, Other PBX Number, Extension Number, Quick Dial Number
• PBX voice data (e.g., ESVM, SVM, OGM) is not converted.
• Data conversion for a SLC/LCOT card in the KX-NS500 is not supported; the number of ports in these
cards is too small.
• In the case of KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, data that is not supported by the data conversion is shown in
the following table.
Unsupported Item Default Setting
Time Mode
Current time mode Location setting default

Time mode switching time (manual mode) Not Stored
Wired/Wireless extensions
Timed Reminder Not set

Station Lock Unlocked
Remote Station Lock Unlocked
Extension Call Charge Total Total cleared
Not Ready/Ready (Wrap-up) Wrap-up status cleared
LCS On/Off Location setting default
Room Status (Check In/Check out/Not Ready/ Location setting default
Cleaned Up)
Auto Answer Location setting default
Absent Message Status Not set
Saved Number Redial Number cleared
ICD Group Login Status (Login/Logout) Location setting default
Message Waiting Cancelled
Incoming Log Cleared
Outgoing Log Cleared
TAM Log Cleared
Personal Absent Message Message cleared

Unsupported Item Default Setting
FWD/DND setting status (intercom/outside Setting Cancelled

calls)
Monitor PBX ID Cleared
Trunk
Call Charge Total Total cleared

Traffic Data Cleared
Incoming Call Group
Message Waiting Cancelled

FWD/DND setting status (FWD/DND set or Setting cancelled
not)
Traffic Data Cleared
Verification Code Information
Verification Code Password, Lock Status Unlocked

Verification Code Password, Lock Counter Counter cleared
Call Charge Total Total cleared
Cabinet Information

Outgoing Log Cleared
Line Error Log Cleared
MPR-LPR Call Data Log Cleared
System Information
Password, Lock Counter for Remote Counter cleared

Programming
Major/Minor Error Cleared
Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Cancelled
In the case of KX-TEx824, data that is supported by the data conversion is shown in the following table.

Converted Item
Supported Item
[x.x.x] : PC Programming-System Menu
[xxx] : PT Programming Number
Number
System Speed Dial/Name
[001]System Speed Dialling Number [6.1]System Speed Dial

[011]System Speed Dialling Name [6.1]System Speed Dial
Extension data
[009]Extension Number [4.1.1]Extension Setting-Extension Number

[604]Extension Name [4.1.1]Extension Setting-Extension Name
[601] TRS-COS-Day [4.1.1]Extension Setting-COS
FWD/DND Setting(*1) [4.1.2]FWD/DND Setting
Flexible CO key (extension and DSS Console) [4.1.4]Flexible Button
(*1) [4.3]DSS Console
Flexible CO key (extension and DSS Console)
The following data is not converted.
– Saved Number Redial
– Caller ID Indication Common/Personal
Caller ID Selection Common/Personal
– LCS Cancel
PF Button [4.1.5]PF Button
[012]Second Feature Numbering Plan [2.6.2]Quick Dial-Phone Number
[310]Account Code [6.3]Verification Code-Verification Code
Toll Restriction
[302]TRS—COS 2 Denied Code [7.1] Denied Code

[300]Carrier Exception Code [8.5]Carrier - Carrier Access Code
[309]Emergency Number [7.4]Emergency Dial
*1
This setting is programmed by Personal Programming.
Note
Review the settings of feature numbers of converted data.
Example: Idle Line Access (Local Access) settings
KX-TVM System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import

Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the Unified
Messaging system of the PBX. System prompts, mailbox prompts, and mailbox messages can be converted.
Condition:
• The required software versions are as follows:

– KX-TVM series: version 1.0 or later

Notice
• Only data recorded by users can be imported; the preinstalled guidance data will not be imported.
• The language set for the KX-TVM series VPS must be set as the language for the Unified Message
system where the voice data will be imported. If the language is different, the data cannot be imported.
• The following content of KX-TVM mailbox's audio data is not restored as the Unified Messaging system
Mailbox data.
– Receive message: Mailbox number of Recorder
– Transfer message: Mailbox number of Recorder/Sender
– Confirmation of hearing a message: Mailbox number of the responder
In this case, the message is treated as if it were recorded by a non-subscriber.
– Mailbox number of Recorder/Sender/Responder is not announced in restored audio data.
– When IMAP integration is used, “Unknown Caller” is shown in the “From” field.
1. Connect a PC to the KX-TVM series VPS, and then start the KX-TVM Maintenance Console.
For details about connecting a PC to the VPS or about the Maintenance Console, refer to the appropriate
documentation.
2. In Maintenance Console, back up the voice data on the KX-TVM series VPS to the PC.
For details about backing up KX-TVM VPS voice data, refer to the documentation of the corresponding
VPS.
3. Start the Main Unit, and then start Web Maintenance Console.
4. Navigate to Maintenance ® Tool ® 10. UM data restore, and then select the types of voice data you want
to restore (i.e., import). You can select the following types of data:
a. System prompts
• For batch restore
Under System Prompts, select the System Prompts check box.
Condition:
The Unified Messaging system has only 8 system prompts, which is less than the number on
KX-TVM VPSs. If you restore system prompts, Prompt 9 and Prompt 10 on the KX-TVM VPS will
not be restored. To import Prompt 9 and Prompt 10 to the Unified Messaging system, they must
be restored individually.
• For individual restore
You can select the voice data to restore one at a time as necessary.
– Installed Prompts – Prompt1 to 8
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greeting
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts and Mailbox Messages
• For batch restore
Under Mailbox Prompts, select the Mailbox Prompts check box, and then select the Mailbox
Messages check box.
• For individual restore
You can select the voice data to restore one at a time as necessary.
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name

– EMD List Member Name

– Mailbox Messages
5. Select a file from Local PC, USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), or NAS to restore, and the folder selection
menu becomes active. Specify the folder where the backup data is saved, and then click OK.
The selected voice data will be imported.
Note
• When using a NAS, ensure that you have sufficient network bandwidth.
6. The import results will be saved in a file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt".
Notice
• It is possible that passwords are set on KX-TVM and Unified Messaging mailboxes. If the passwords
for KX-TVM mailboxes are different from the Unified Messaging mailbox passwords, and data is being
restored (imported) individually, you will be prompted for the password of the Unified Messaging
mailbox. If password authentication fails 3 times, the voice data for that mailbox will not be imported.
• If you are not prompted for mailbox passwords during the restore, the password set for the mailbox in
the Unified Messaging system will be used. If no passwords are set for Unified Messaging mailboxes
(excluding the manager mailboxes), the default password specified in the Unified Messaging system
will be applied. If the default password setting is disabled, the password "1111" will be applied. The
default mailbox password will not be applied to the manager mailboxes.

KX-TDA100/200 series TVM series

KX-TEx824
Convert
Convert
System
VM Prompt
Data
KX-TVM Maintenance Console

Maintenance Console Get VM prompt and save
to PC.
Get DSYS or xxxxx.kea
and save to PC.
Database Converter
Start Database converter.
Select DSYS or xxxxx.kea
and start conversion.
Convert Execute
Off line Web-MC

Edit additional parameters
by Offline Web-MC.
Set User configurations.

Ex.) Setting UserProfile/
MBOX etc.
Web-MC
Connect to KX-NS500 and
transfer DFSYS.
Reboot KX-NS500 Main Unit*1
Abbreviations
DxSYS: System File for PBX
Web-MC: Web Maintenance Console Web-MC
VM: Voice Mail system
UM Restore
UM: Unified Message system
*1
KX-NS500

VPS System Data Import

System data from a KX-TVM series VPS can be imported into the PBX’s Unified Messaging system using the
Off-line Web Maintenance Console’s import feature.
Condition:
The required software versions are as follows:
– KX-TVM series: version 3.0 or later
– KX-NS500: version 4.0 or later
Note
• The following settings can be imported from a VPS:
– Mailbox settings
– Custom service settings
– Call routing settings
• When importing mailbox settings, you must first create mailboxes in the Unified Messaging system with
the same numbers as those in the VPS. The settings of the matching mailbox numbers will then be
imported. However, you can select whether mailbox passwords will be imported.
• For the settings of mailboxes that do not match a mailbox in the VPS’s settings, the Unified Messaging
system’s default values will be set.
• If there are any errors when importing data from the VPS, such as differences in value ranges, importing
will be skipped for the affected mailbox and an error will be recorded in the report. Processing will then
continue with the next mailbox.
• When importing custom service settings, the custom service settings for the Unified Messaging system
will first be set to their default values, and then the VPS’s custom service settings will be added. Be
aware that any existing custom service settings in the Unified Messaging system will be reset to their
default values.
• The VPS’s custom services will be imported into the Unified Messaging system’s custom service seats
as follows:
PBX Unified Messaging system custom
VPS custom service number
service seat number
1–50 1
51–100 2
• If the service type being imported from the VPS is "Menu & Transfer", and "Guidance #9" or "Guidance
#10" is specified for "Prompt Mode", importing will be cancelled for that custom service and an error
will be recorded in the report. Processing will then continue with the next custom service.
• The following call routing settings can be imported. (DDI/DID routing is not supported.)
– Caller ID routing
– PIN routing
• When importing call routing settings, the call routing settings for the Unified Messaging will first be set
to their default values, and then the VPS's call routing settings will be added. Be aware that any existing
call routing settings in the Unified Messaging system will be reset to their default values.
• If there are any errors when importing call routing settings from the VPS, importing will be cancelled
for the affected call routing settings, and an error will be recorded in the report. Processing will then
continue with the next call routing settings.
• Settings for features in the VPS that the Unified Messaging system does not support are not imported.
To import system data from a VPS

1. Connect a PC to the VPS, and then start the VPS’s Maintenance Console.
For details about connecting a PC to the VPS or about the Maintenance Console, refer to the VPS’s
documentation.

2. In Maintenance Console, back up the system data on the VPS to the PC.
The file name of the backup will be similar to:
"SystemParameters50_20140423161816.bkp"
For details about backing up, refer to the documentation of the VPS.
3. Start the PBX’s Off-line Web Maintenance Console.
To import the VPS data into an existing PBX’s system data, save the PBX's system data beforehand. For
details, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
4. Log in using the Installer level account.
5. Navigate to Maintenance ® Tool ® Import ® VM System Data.
6. In Select a Destination UM-Group No., select the UM-group number.
7. In TVM database file, select the system data file name to import.
8. Select the data to import.
• Mailbox—Mailbox Parameters
• Mailbox—Mailbox Password
• Custom Service Settings
• Call Routing—Caller-ID Mode Settings
• Call Routing—PIN Mode Settings
9. Click OK.
The data will be imported into the PBX’s system data. The start and end time of the import as well as the
import results will be displayed on the report. You can save this to the local PC.
10. Save the PBX system data with the imported VPS system data to the PC so it can be transferred to a PBX.
For details about transferring the file to the PBX, refer to "7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX" in
11. Restart the PBX to apply the new system data.
VPS
VPS Maintenance Console
Back up the system data to PC
PBX Off-line Web Maintenance Console
Back up the system data to PC
Import VPS system data into

PBX system data
Transfer system data

5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
5.4 Programming the PBX

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will set up the mandatory settings required for the PBX.
When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy
Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically. You must log in using the Installer level account name
and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
1. After Easy Setup Wizard launches, the Easy Setup Wizard screen appears:
a. In WebMC Language Setting, select a language from the drop-down list.
b. In PBX Type, select a PBX type.
Standalone:
This PBX will be used as a standalone system. The standalone PBX controls all terminals, trunks, and
applications.
Slave:
This PBX will serve as a Slave unit in a One-look network. The Slave unit can share setup information
and resources controlled by the Master unit.
Note
When Slave is selected, the Location Setting and Password settings are not editable. Skip these
settings and go to One-look Network (step e).
c. In Location Setting, select a location from drop-down list.
d. In Password Setting, enter a password for the Installer level account. In Re-enter, enter the same
password.
e. When Slave is selected in step b, in One-look Network, specify whether to activate the 60-day
One-look Networking Trial Activation Key.
– If Active is selected, the 60-day trial will begin when the Easy Setup Wizard is completed.
– If Non Active is selected, you will have to activate the trial manually in order to use One-look
Networking Features on a trial basis.
f. Click Start Setup Wizard.
Note
If the location is changed from its default value, a notice about restarting the PBX is displayed. Click
OK to restart the PBX. After the PBX restarts, start Web Maintenance Console again (refer to
"Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console"). When you
start the Easy Setup Wizard again, you will start from step 1, below.
2. In the Date & Time Settings:
a. Select a time zone from the drop-down list.
b. Click the Local Time box, and then select the date and time from the menu.
c. In Automatic Time Adjustment, enter information as necessary.
d. In Daylight Saving, select the appropriate option.
e. Click Next.
3. In the Numbering settings:
a. In Feature No, select the appropriate option.
b. In CO Access/Operator No, select the appropriate options.
c. Select one of the following options for Select default value of Numbering Plan:
– 3 digits Extension Number
– 4 digits Extension Number

d. Click Next.
Note
Depending on the value selected above, the numbering plan of the PBX will vary as follows. Select this
value with care.

3 digits 4 digits
Extension Extension
Number Number
Extension Number 101–xxx 1001–xxxx
or or
201–xxx 2001–xxxx
Floating Extension Number
UM Group 500 5000

DISA (1–64) 501–564 5001–5064
Built-in Simplified Voice 591 5091
Message (SVM)
Analogue Remote Maintenance 599 5099
TAFAS (Pager) 600 6000
ICD Group (1–64) 601–664 6001–6064
ISDN Remote Maintenance 699 6099
UM Channel (1–2) 592, 593 5092, 5093
4. In the Manager/Operator settings:

a. Select an extension number for the manager from the drop-down list.
b. Select an extension number for the operator from the drop-down list.
c. Click Next.
5. In the Trunk settings:
a. In CO Dialling Mode, select the appropriate option.
b. In Selection for PRI30/E1, select the appropriate option.
c. Select an option for Incoming Call Distribution Group. You can select "Yes" or "No". Refer to the
information on this screen for details.
d. Click Next.
6. In the LAN settings:
The IP addresses for the PBX, DNS server, and DSP card can be assigned automatically through a DHCP
server or entered manually.
When using a DHCP server:

a. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.
b. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically.
c. Select Obtain DSP IP address automatically.
Notice
The boxes will turn grey and the IP address information will be assigned automatically.
Write down the address information assigned to the PBX for future reference.
d. Click Next.
When not using a DHCP server:

a. Select Use the following IP address.
b. Enter an IP address*1, subnet mask*2, and default gateway*1. (You may not need to specify the default
gateway, depending on your network configuration.)
c. Select Use the following DNS server address.

d. Enter the preferred and alternative DNS IP addresses*1.

e. Select Use the following DSP IP address.
f. Enter up to 2 IP addresses*1 for each installed DSP card.
g. Click Next.
*1
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.1" to "223.255.255.254"
*2
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
7. In the VoIP (Ext) settings:
In Number of IP Extensions:
a. In IP-PT(NT), specify the number of IP-PT extensions.
b. In UT/UDT, specify the number of UT/UDT extensions.
c. In SIP-Phone, specify the number of SIP extensions.
Note
You can confirm the required number of virtual IP extension cards, total IP extensions and total
virtual IP extension cards.
d. In IP Terminal Registration Mode, select one of the following options:

• Manual: Manually register IP terminal information.
• Full Automatic: Automatically register IP terminal information.
• Extension Number Input: Automatically register IP terminal information except the extension
number. The extension number can then be registered from the IP telephone manually.
Note
• The Full Automatic and Extension Number Input registration modes may not be available for
certain types of IP terminals. In such cases, select Manual as the registration mode.
• For more information about the IP terminal registration modes, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones".
e. In DHCP Server, select either Disable or Enable.
f. If you select Enable in DHCP Server, enter valid settings for the automatic assignment of IP addresses.
g. Click Finish.
8. Follow the prompts of the Easy Setup Wizard. If LAN settings were changed from their default values in
step 6, you will be prompted to restart the PBX after the Easy Setup Wizard is complete. Click OK to restart
the PBX. The login screen will be displayed. Click Skip to finish the Easy Setup Wizard and continue the
configuration from the home screen without restarting the PBX.
Notice
If you select Skip, restart the PBX after completing the settings.
9. Log in with the Installer level account using the password entered during Easy Setup Wizard. The Home
Screen is displayed. You may now begin programming the PBX.
Notice
If an external DHCP server is in use, it must be able to use the "client identifier" option specified by
RFC 213.
Changing IP Address Settings

IP addressing information for the PBX can also be changed from Web Maintenance Console after the Easy
Setup Wizard has been completed.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® IP Address/Ports.
2. Click the Basic Settings tab.
3. When using a DHCP server:
a. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.

b. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically.

c. Select Obtain DSP IP address automatically.
Notice
The boxes will turn grey and the IP address information will be assigned automatically.
Write down the address information assigned to the PBX for future reference.
When not using a DHCP server:

a. Select Use the following IP address.
b. Enter an IP address*1, Subnet Mask*2, and Default Gateway*1.
(The default gateway may not need to be specified depending on your network configuration.)
c.Select Use the following DNS server address.
d.Enter the preferred and alternative DNS IP addresses*1.
e.Select Use the following DSP IP address.
f.Enter up to 2 IP addresses*1 for each installed DSP card.
4. Click OK.
a. A screen will appear stating that any changes made in step 3 will be activated after the PBX is restarted.
b. Click OK.
5. Restart the PBX.
a. Click Maintenance ® System Control ® System Reset.
b. On the System Reset screen, click Backup.
*1
*2
Notice
• Do not change the IP address of the PBX once IP telephones are registered to the PBX using the set
IP address. The IP telephones will not operate properly if the IP address of the PBX is changed. When
an external DHCP server is used to automatically assign IP addresses, it must be configured to always
allocate the same IP address to the PBX. For details, consult your network administrator.
• If an external DHCP server is in use, it must be able to use a "client identifier" option specified by RFC
2131.
• If an external DHCP server is in use, the DHCP Server feature of the PBX must be disabled.
• The PBX will not start properly if IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP server
when the PBX has been set to obtain IP addresses automatically. In this case, you need to consult
your network administrator because the DHCP server in your network may not be running or a network
failure may have occurred. If the DHCP server is not available, enter IP addresses manually, then
restart the PBX.
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system
data to the PBX memory. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
PBX memory, it can be easily reloaded.
To save the system data to the PBX memory while programming, click the disk button ( ) ® Yes
® OK. Be sure to save the system data to the PBX memory before restarting the PBX, or any changes
may be lost.
• When no operations are performed for more than 60 minutes (default), you will be automatically logged
out from Web Maintenance Console and unsaved data will be lost.
Changing the Display Language

The language used for Web Maintenance Console can be changed after the Easy Setup Wizard has completed.
1. Click Setup ® Users ® User Profiles.
2. Select the check box for the Installer level account.

5.4.3 Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX
3. Click .
The Edit User screen will be displayed.
4. Select the preferred language in Change Language.
5. Click OK.
The screen will redisplay in the selected language immediately.
5.4.2 Enabling the DHCP Server Feature

This PBX is equipped with a DHCP Server feature. When the feature is enabled, it allows you to centrally
manage and automate the assignment of IP addresses for the devices located in same LAN using Web
Maintenance Console.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ®
DHCP.
2. On the DHCP Server tab, select Enable for DHCP
Server.
3. Enter valid settings for the IP address auto
assignment.
Note
For details about IP address auto assignment
settings, refer to "27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1]
Server Feature—DHCP" in the PC Programming
Manual.
4. Click OK.
Note
If an external DHCP server is in use, do not enable the DHCP Server feature. Doing so may allocate
inappropriate IP addressing information to the devices.
5.4.3 Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX

1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration
® Slot.
2. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the
menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
3. Click on the name of the virtual card to install in the list
on the right. An image of the virtual card will be displayed
to the left of the list, and information about the card will
be shown below.
4. Click and drag the image of the virtual card to the free
virtual slot it is to be installed in, and release it. The virtual
card will move into the slot space.
5. Click OK to confirm.

5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys
5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys

The corresponding number of IP trunks, IP telephones or enhanced features can be activated by installing the
downloaded activation key file(s) using Web Maintenance Console.
Installing the Activation Key Files

Be sure to connect the PC to the PBX in advance. For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to
"5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account.
2. Click Maintenance ® Utility ® Activation Key Installation.
Activation Key Installation window will be displayed.
3. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
4. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
5. When installation is complete, the message, "The activation key has been installed and activated
successfully!" is displayed.
6. Click OK.
Notice
The activation key file can only be installed in the PBX with the MPR ID number entered when the activation
key file was downloaded. The activation key file cannot be reissued unless the mother board crashes.
Note
• You can click the provided link to directly access activation key information and programme the number
of activated IP trunks and IP softphones.
• For information about programming activation keys using Web Maintenance Console, refer to "9.3 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status" in the PC Programming Manual.

Depending on your configuration, it may be necessary to programme the number of provided IP Trunk channels
to be used for H.323 trunks. By default, all of the provided IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphone(s) can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. By default, only IP softphone(s) can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key.

1. a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®

Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Activation Key.
2. a. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of
IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 trunks.
Note
If you have changed the value for Number of
activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to
restart the V-IPGW cards for the change to take
effect.
b. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the
number of IP softphones to be used through the IP
Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key.
3. Click OK.

5.5.1 Assigning the Hunt Pattern
5.5 Programming an H.323 QSIG Network

There are 2 methods to programme the Virtual VoIP Gateway Card (V-IPGW card) to establish VoIP
communications between PBXs at different locations, as follows:
PBX code method The caller dials the unique PBX code of the PBX to which the called party is
connected, in addition to the destination number.
Extension number The caller dials only the destination number of the called party to call through
method PBXs at different locations (hence there are fewer digits to dial than with the
PBX code method).
Note
• For a detailed explanation about each method, refer to "4.3 Private Network Features" in the Feature
Guide.
• Portions of this software are © 1996–2006 RADVISION Ltd. All intellectual property rights in such
portions of the Software and documentation are owned by RADVISION and are protected by United
States copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. RADVISION
and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted.
5.5.1 Assigning the Hunt Pattern

The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. The procedure
below demonstrates the process of programming the hunt pattern of the local PBX. After the hunt pattern at
the local PBX has been fully assigned, repeat the procedure for the hunt pattern at the remote PBX with the
appropriate setting values.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the installed
V-IPGW16 card. A menu will be shown under the
mouse pointer.
d. Click Shelf Property.
e. Click Hunt Pattern.
Status Light
2. a. When using the PBX code method:

In the Leading Number cell, type the local PBX
code and extension starting digit.
When using the extension number method:

In the Leading Number cell, type the local extension
starting digit.
b. Click OK to return to the Shelf Property screen.

5.5.2 Programming the Address Translation Table
Note
For more details about hunt pattern assignment, refer to "9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern" in the PC Programming Manual.

The function of an address translation table in a VoIP network is to provide 2-way translation of telephone
numbers and IP addresses*1. Therefore, a caller can reach the destination by dialling the number without
knowing the destination IP address.
The procedure below demonstrates the process of programming the address translation table at the local PBX.
After the address translation table at the local PBX has been fully programmed, repeat the procedure for the
address translation table at the remote PBX with the appropriate setting values.
b. Click System Property.
c. Click the V-IPGW tab.
d. Click GW Settings.
2. In the Main tab, do the following to configure the

gateway entry for the remote PBX:
a. In the GW Name cell, type a unique identifier of the
destination in the VoIP network.
b. In the GW IP Address cell, type the IP address of
the destination gateway device.
c. In the GW Group cell, select None.
Note
Having the value None for GW Group means
that the destination gateway device does not
belong to any gateway group. Grouping is useful
when installing multiple gateway devices at one
location. For details, refer to "9.2.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main"
d. Click OK to return to the System Property screen.
*1
IP address-to-telephone number translation can also be handled by using an H.323 Gatekeeper device. To configure Gatekeeper
devices, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. This manual focuses on the method using the V-IPGW card’s internal address
translation capabilities.


b. Click System Property.
c. Click the V-IPGW tab.
d. Click DN2IP.
e. When using the PBX code method:
In the Leading Number cell, type the remote PBX
code and starting digit of destination extension.
When using the extension number method:

In the Leading Number cell, type the remote PBX
code and starting digit of destination extension.
f. In the Remaining Number of Digits cell, type a
number of digits to dial following the leading number.
g. In GW No./GW Group Selection, select GW No.
h. In the GW No. cell, select 1 (the gateway entry for
the destination gateway device at the remote PBX).
i. Click OK.
Note
For more details about gateway settings, refer to "9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main" in the PC Programming
Manual.

5.5.3 Programming the Network Settings

For successful operation of a VoIP network using the V-IPGW card, network settings for the PBX at each
location must be programmed appropriately. For a detailed discussion of related features, refer to the Feature
Guide.
This section details the procedure to programme the network settings for the local PBX. After the programming
for the local PBX has been done, repeat the procedure for the remote PBX with the appropriate setting values.
The following procedures describe the process of programming the network settings for each numbering
method.
Programming for the PBX Code Method

1. a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® CO &
Incoming Call.
b. Click CO Line Settings.
c. Type the CO Name and assign an unused Trunk
Group Number to be used for all IP trunks.
d. Click OK.
2. Note
Before changing Numbering Plan settings, when a
V-SIPEXT card or V-UTEXT card is installed,
change the status of the card(s) to OUS.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® System.
b. Click Numbering Plan.
c. Click Main.
d. Click the Features tab.
e. In the TIE Line Access cell, type the dialling
number.
f. Click OK.
3. a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Private
Network.
b. Click TIE Table.
c. In the Own PBX Code cell, type the PBX code of the
local PBX in the network.
d. In the first unused Leading Number cell, type the
PBX code of the remote PBX in the network.
e. In the corresponding Trunk Group list, select the
number of the trunk group to be used when making
calls.
f. If it is necessary to add number(s) to the input
number, enter the number(s) to be added in the
desired Added Number cell.
If it is necessary to delete number(s) from the input
number, enter the number(s) to be deleted in the
desired Removed Number of Digits cell.
g. Click OK.

Programming for the Extension Number Method

1. a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® CO &
Incoming Call.
b. Click CO Line Settings.
c. Type the CO Name and assign an unused Trunk
Group Number to be used for all IP trunks.
d. Click OK.
2. Note
Before changing Numbering Plan settings, when a
V-SIPEXT card or V-UTEXT card is installed,
change the status of the card(s) to OUS.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® System.
b. Click Numbering Plan.
c. Click Main.
d. Click the Other PBX Extension tab.
e. In the Dial (3 digits) cell, type a starting digit of
destination extension.
f. Click OK.
3. a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Private
Network.
b. Click TIE Table.
c. In the Leading Number cell, type the starting digit
of destination extension.
d. Click OK.
Note
For details about network parameter settings, refer to the relevant sections of the PC Programming Manual.

5.6 Programming SIP Trunks

The Virtual SIP Trunk Card (V-SIPGW) is a virtual trunk card which is designed to be easily integrated into an
Internet Telephony Service provided by an ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider).
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP gateway port.
Accessing Port Properties

1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration
® Slot.
2. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the
menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
3. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPGW16 card to
display the menu of options, and then click Ous.
4. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPGW16 card to
display the menu of options again, and then click Port
Property.
Programming Port Properties

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port. Available SIP providers can be selected, and a different SIP provider can be assigned
to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Note
It is necessary to import a SIP provider list file (comma-separated value [CSV] file) in advance to use the
automatic programming feature.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
Note
If the desired SIP provider is not shown in the drop-down list, it is necessary to programme the desired
parameters manually. For information about the manual programming procedure, refer to "Manual
Programming" below.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting a
provider.
1. Click the desired tab.
2. Enter information or select settings from the drop-down list for each parameter.
Parameters that Require Manual Programming

Manual programming is compulsory for the following parameters:
• User Name: Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider. (Max. 64 characters)
• Authentication ID: Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server. (Max. 64
characters)
• Authentication Password: Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP
provider. (Max. 32 characters)
Follow the steps below to programme these 3 parameters.
1. Click an Account tab.
2. In the User Name column, enter the user name provided
by the SIP provider.
3. In the Authentication ID column, enter the
authentication ID required for registration with the SIP
server.
4. In the Authentication Password column, the
authentication password used for registration with the
SIP provider.
5. Click OK.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles

Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway
port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to
select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to add
the settings to provider profiles.
3. Click Execute.
Note
For more details about SIP gateway port settings, refer to the PC Programming Manual.

5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
5.7 Assigning Networking Information to IP

Telephones

The IP telephone’s IP address, subnet mask address and default gateway address, and the PBX’s IP address
must be assigned to the IP telephone before it can be used on the network. This IP addressing information
can be assigned in the following ways:
For IP-PTs
• Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on the
same LAN as the PBX
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and the
default gateway address to the IP-PT.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the IP-PT in the process of being registered
to the PBX. For details about registering the IP-PT, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Note
For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
• Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on a
remote office LAN
While the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the IP-PT, the PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually.
Follow the procedure below to assign the PBX’s IP address.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, follow the procedure described in "5.7.2 Setting VLAN
Parameters" after assigning the IP addresses, without ending programming.
Note
• By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-PT, it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP address to
other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to
"9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option—
Announce Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.
• IP-PTs can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when IP-PTs are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
• Since the default setting of the DHCP client function is enabled for IP-PTs, simply connect the
IP-PTs to the LAN to use the DHCP server.
• For KX-NT511 Users
Since there is no PROGRAM button on a KX-NT511, press flexible button 1, 2, or 3 instead.
Also,there is no Navigator key either. To select items on the LCD, use flexible button 1 for left-arrow
operation and flexible button 3 for right-arrow operation.

KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT511 and KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
*1
Select "PBX". ENTER Select "PBX IP Address". ENTER Select "Primary PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER ENTER
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX*2
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary PBX". ENTER ENTER
To set VLAN parameters

To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
STORE The IP-PT will reboot

and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Return to the
Menu screen. Press "STORE".
*1
For KX-NT300 series: Software version 2.00 or later only
*2
Optional for KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.

KX-NT321/KX-NT511/KX-NT551

Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
Select "PBX". Press SP-PHONE. Select "PBX IP Press SP-PHONE. Select "Primary
Address". PBX".
PBX IP Address
Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX (if required)
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.

PBX".
Press HOLD twice to return

to the Menu screen.

OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
Press STORE.
Note
For details about operating the PROGRAM button and other buttons, refer to "For IP-PTs" in
"5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information".
• To confirm the connection to the secondary PBX after assigning IP addressing information, (1) turn
the IP-PT’s power off, and (2) hold the STORE button and 2 key while turning the power on.

KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
PROG.

Press PROGRAM

VOL
PBX IP HOLD
Address
Press VOLUME Press SP-PHONE Press SP-PHONE. Press HOLD to return

to select "PBX". twice. to the Menu screen.

OR
To end programming
and can then be
Press STORE.

• Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on
the same LAN as the PBX
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the IP-PT in the process of being registered
to the PBX. For details about registering the IP-PT, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Follow the procedure below to assign the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and the default
gateway address manually.
SETUP
Press "SETUP" when it is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Select "Network". ENTER Select "Disable" Select "IP Address". ENTER

for DHCP setting.
IP Address*1
ENTER
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2

Select "Subnet Mask". ENTER ENTER
To set the default gateway address (if required)
Default Gateway Address*3

Select "Default Gateway". ENTER ENTER
Return to the Select "PBX". ENTER Select "PBX IP ENTER Select "Secondary
Menu screen. Address". PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER ENTER
Continued on next page

Continued from previous page
Return to the
Menu screen.
OR
To end programming

and can then be
Return to the Press "STORE".
Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3
*4
Note


Press PROGRAM
Select "Network". Press SP-PHONE. Select "DHCP (Disable)". Press SP-PHONE

twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Subnet Mask". Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Default GW". Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD to return Select "PBX". Press SP-PHONE. Select "PBX IP Press SP-PHONE. Select "Secondary
to the Menu screen. Address". PBX".
PBX IP Address

to the Menu screen.


OR
To end programming
and can then be
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3
Note

PROG.

Press PROGRAM

VOL VOL
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE

select "Network". select "DHCP (Disable)". twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.

VOL
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.

select "Subnet Mask".

VOL

select "Default GW".

HOLD
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
OR
To end programming
HOLD The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
Press HOLD to return Press STORE.
to the Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3

• Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on
a remote office LAN
All of the IP addressing information must be assigned manually.
Follow the procedure below to assign the IP addressing information.
Note
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-PT, it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP address to other
IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to "9.14 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option— Announce Mode" in

SETUP
Press "SETUP" when it is displayed.
Select "Network". ENTER Select "Disable" Select "IP Address". ENTER

for DHCP setting.
IP Address*1
ENTER

Select "Subnet Mask". ENTER ENTER
To set the default gateway address

Select "Default Gateway". ENTER ENTER

*4
Return to the Select "PBX". ENTER Select "PBX IP ENTER Select "Primary
Menu screen. Address". PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER ENTER

PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary PBX". ENTER ENTER
Return to the
Menu screen.
OR
To end programming

and can then be
Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Note


Press PROGRAM
Select "Network". Press SP-PHONE. Select "DHCP (Disable)". Press SP-PHONE

twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Subnet Mask". Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Default GW". Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD to return Select "PBX". Press SP-PHONE. Select "PBX IP Press SP-PHONE. Select "Primary
to the Menu screen. Address". PBX".
PBX IP Address
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary Press SP-PHONE. Press SP-PHONE.

PBX".


to the Menu screen.

OR
To end programming
and can then be
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3
Note

PROG.

Press PROGRAM

VOL VOL
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE

select "Network". select "DHCP (Disable)". twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.

VOL

select "Subnet Mask".

VOL

select "Default GW".

VOL
HOLD HOLD
PBX IP
Address
Press HOLD
twice to return Press VOLUME Press SP-PHONE Press Press HOLD
to the Menu screen. to select "PBX". twice. SP-PHONE. to return to the
Menu screen.
OR
To end programming
and can then be
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3

For KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Notice
When you want to use a KX-UT series SIP phone that has already been used with another PBX, or that
has had its settings programmed, you must reset the SIP phone to its factory default before assigning new
IP address information as detailed in the following procedure.
For details, refer to the documentation for the KX-UT series SIP phone.
Assigning the IP addressing information to the SIP phone

• Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) to automate the assignment
of IP addressing information
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the SIP phone.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the SIP phone in the process of being
registered to the PBX. For details about registering the SIP phone, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones".
Note
For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
• Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when assigning IP
addressing information
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the SIP phone in the process of being
registered to the PBX. For details about registering the SIP phone, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones". The IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address
must be assigned manually. For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Note
• When the PBX is not in the same network as the SIP phone, the IP address of the PBX must be
assigned manually. For instructions for manually setting PBX network information, refer to
"Assigning the IP address of the PBX to a SIP phone".
• When assigning IP addressing information to the SIP phone, do not use the phone’s Web user
interface programming.
Assigning the IP address of the PBX to a SIP phone

The IP address of the PBX is automatically assigned to a SIP phone when the SIP phone is in the same LAN
as the PBX. However, when the SIP phone is in a different LAN from the PBX, the following procedure is
required to assign the IP address of the PBX manually using the Web user interface.
Notice
Do not perform any other operation rather than following procedure with the Web user interface. Otherwise
the SIP phone may not work properly. In that case, contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service
Centre.
1. Prepare a configuration file to specify the IP address of the PBX.
When the SIP Phones are in a segment that uses NAT traversal
a. Open a text editor on a PC, and then write exactly same as the following:

For standard connection

# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
### Management Server Settings #######

ACS_URL="http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy/cwmp/cwmpAction.cgi"
For secure connection

# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
### Management Server Settings #######
ACS_URL="http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy/cwmp/cwmpAction.cgi"
CFG_INT_CERTIFICATE_PATH=http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:zzz/utdownload/KX-NS500
Notice
• For "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy", enter the IP address and port number of the network router which is
in a same LAN with the PBX.
The router accessed by the SIP phone must have static NAT/NAPT settings enabled so that
the packets sent to xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy to be transferred to the PBX. For details, refer to
"Connection via Internet" in "5.2 PC Connection" and "Internet Connection (SSL
Connection):" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
• Configuration files must end with an empty line.
b. Save the text file as "UT_ACS.cfg".
When the SIP Phones are in a different segments of the same LAN
a. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
b. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
c. Select the config file (UT_ACS_xxyyyy.cfg), and then download it to your PC.
For more details about downloading files from a PBX to a PC, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer
PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
xx: Site ID (2 digits)
yyyy: Site name*1 (Up to 32 characters*2)
*1
Spaces as well as the following characters in site names will be replaced with underscores.
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
*2
In some cases, the full site name may not be included in the file name even if it is less than 32 characters.
When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)
a. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
b. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
c. Select the config file (UT_ACS_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg), and then download it to your PC.
Note
• xx: Site ID (2 digits)
*1
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
*2
• When SIP phones use the internet to communicate with the PBX, the PBX uses the HTTPS
protocol for security.

2. Confirm the IP address of the SIP phone.

For non-KX-UT670 telephones
a. Press Setting or Setup (soft button) on the SIP phone.
b. Select "Information Display", then press [ENTER].
c. Select "IP address".
The IP address of the SIP phone will be displayed.
d. Press [CANCEL].
For KX-UT670 telephones
a. Tap the status bar.
For details about the status bar, refer to the documentation of the KX-UT670.
b. Tap Phone status.
The IP address of the SIP phone will be displayed.
c. Tap OK.
3. Open the port of the SIP phone, which is used by the PCs to access the Web user interface.
For non-KX-UT670 telephones
a. Press Setting or Setup (soft button) on the SIP phone.
b. Press [#][5][3][4].
c. Select "On" for "Embedded web", then press [ENTER].
Note
If no operations are made for 30 minutes, the port will be closed again automatically.
For KX-UT670 telephones
a. On the Home screen, press .
b. Tap Settings.
c. Tap About Phone.
d. Touch and hold .
e. Press [#][5][3][4], and then press Enter.
f. Select On for Embedded web.
Note
If no operations are made for 30 minutes, the port will be closed again automatically.
4. Access the Web user interface from the PC.
Note
If a KX-UT670 with software version 01.200 or lower is used with the PBX, the KX-UT670 must be
reset to its factory default before you perform the following procedure. For details about resetting the
KX-UT670, refer to the documentation of the KX-UT670.
a. Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the SIP phone’s IP address into the
address field of your browser.
b. For authentication, enter your ID and password, and then click OK.
The Installer Level ID and Password are as follows.
ID: instoperatoruserid
Password: instpass
c. Select Maintenance ® Import Configuration File.
d. Click Browse… , and then select the UT_ACS configuration file. (UT_ACS.cfg or UT_ACS_xxyyyy.cfg)
e. Click Import.

When the configuration file is successfully imported, the SIP phone starts to access the PBX
automatically.
5. Confirm if the configuration file was successfully loaded.

a. Select Maintenance ® Export Configuration File.
b. Click Export to download the configuration file being used currently on the SIP phone.
c. Compare the UT_ACS configuration file and the downloaded file. If the UT_ACS configuration file was
successfully loaded, the contents of those 2 files will be exactly the same.
Notice
When the 2 UT_ACS configuration files do not match, and if the SIP phone does not work properly,
contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
For Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) to automate the assignment
of IP addressing information
The IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address can be assigned
to the SIP phone automatically by the DHCP server.
The PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually on the SIP phone side.

For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when assigning IP
addressing information
For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Note
• A SIP phone can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when SIP phones are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
• When the DHCP client function is enabled for SIP phones, simply connect them to the LAN to use the
DHCP server. For details about the DHCP client function setting, refer to the documentation of the SIP
phone.
For IP-CSs
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on the same
LAN as the PBX
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and the
default gateway address to the IP-CS.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the IP-CS in the process of being registered
to the PBX.
For details about registering the IP-CS, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones" and corresponding
manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
• For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on a remote
office LAN
While the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the IP-CS, the PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually.
To assign the PBX’s IP address, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to the corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
• By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only), it is possible to assign the
PBX’s IP address to other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For
details, refer to "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port
Property—V-IPCS—Option— Announce Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.
• IP-CSs can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when IP-CSs are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
• Since the default setting of the DHCP client function is enabled for IP-CSs, simply connect the
IP-CSs to the LAN to use the DHCP server.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on the
same LAN as the PBX
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the IP-CS in the process of being registered
to the PBX.
For details about registering the IP-CS, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones" and corresponding
manuals for the IP-CS.

To assign the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address
manually, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on a
remote office LAN
To assign the IP addressing information, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only), it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP
address to other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to
"9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Option— Announce
Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.

5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters

To establish voice communications between IP telephones, the primary ports of the IP telephones and the
connected PBX must belong to the same VLAN. Consult your network administrator and obtain the appropriate
VLAN ID.
If you are using an IP telephone equipped with two ports, it is possible to place primary and secondary ports
of the IP telephone on different VLANs by assigning separate VLAN IDs to each port.
Follow the procedure below for all IP-PTs on the network, using appropriate VLAN IDs.
Note
The procedure for SIP phones may vary depending on the type of the SIP phone being used. Refer to the
documentation of your SIP phone for instructions.
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS". ENTER Select "VLAN". ENTER Select "Enable" for
VLAN setting.
To set the VLAN ID for the primary port
VLAN ID
Select "Primary port". ENTER Select "VLAN ID". ENTER 1–4094

0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x)
VLAN Priority*1
ENTER Select "VLAN Priority". ENTER 0–7 ENTER
To set the VLAN ID for the secondary port
Return to the Select ENTER Select "VLAN ID". ENTER

VLAN setting screen. "Secondary port (TO PC)".
*1
VLAN ID VLAN Priority
1
1–4094 ENTER Select ENTER 0–7 ENTER

0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x) "VLAN Priority".
To end programming

and can then be
Menu screen.
*1
The VLAN priority of the primary port must be set higher than the priority of the secondary port. The larger the number, the higher
the priority.

Note
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS". Press SP-PHONE. Select "VLAN". Press SP-PHONE.
Select "VLAN (Enable)". Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN ID
Select "VLAN (Primary)". Press SP-PHONE. Select "VLAN ID". 1–4094 Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN Priority*1
Select "Priority". 0–7 Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN ID
Select "VLAN (Secondary)". Press SP-PHONE. Select "VLAN ID". 1–4094 Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN Priority*1
To end programming
and can then be
Press HOLD three Press STORE.

times to return to the
Menu screen.
*1
the priority.
Note

VOL VOL VOL
After assigning
the IP addresses
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press VOLUME to
select "QoS". select "VLAN". select "VLAN (Enable)".
VLAN ID VLAN Priority
Press SP-PHONE. 1–4094 Press SP-PHONE. 0–7 Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
HOLD
and can then be

to the Menu screen.

5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters

LLDP-MED is a technique for IP telephones to obtain VLAN settings automatically from a network device, such
as a Network Switch.
If you are using an IP telephone equipped with two LAN ports, the primary and secondary ports of the IP
telephone can be placed on different VLANs by assigning a separate VLAN ID to each port. Follow the
procedure below for all IP-PTs on the network, using appropriate VLAN IDs.
Note
• This feature is available only for KX-NT511, KX-NT551, KX-NT553, and KX-NT556 IP-PTs.
• VLAN settings configured through PT programming have priority over VLAN settings configured
through the LLDP-MED function.
• To enable or disable the sending of LLDP packets from the PBX, consult your dealer.

KX-NT553/KX-NT556
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS". ENTER Select "LLDP". ENTER Select "Enable" for
LLDP setting.
VLAN ID*1
Select "Primary port". ENTER Select "VLAN ID". ENTER 0–4094
VLAN Priority*1*2
Select "VLAN Priority". ENTER 0–7
Return to the Select ENTER Select "VLAN ID". ENTER

LLDP setting screen. "Secondary port".
VLAN ID*1 VLAN Priority

1 *1*2
0–4094 ENTER Select ENTER 0–7 ENTER

"VLAN Priority".
To set the Interval time for LLDP
Return to the Select ENTER Select "LLDP (Interval)". ENTER

LLDP setting screen. "LLDP (Secondary)".
INTERVAL
1–3600 ENTER
To end programming

and can then be
Menu screen.
*1
The VLAN ID and the VLAN priority are set automatically for the primary port; these are reference only. However, the VLAN ID and
the VLAN priority for secondary port must be set manually.
*2
the priority.

KX-NT511/KX-NT551
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS". Press SP-PHONE. Select "LLDP". Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Enable" Press SP-PHONE.

for LLDP setting.
VLAN ID*1
Select "LLDP (Primary)". Press SP-PHONE. Select "VLAN ID". 0–4094 Select "Priority".
VLAN Priority*1*2
0–7
VLAN ID*1
Select "LLDP (Secondary)". Press SP-PHONE. Select "VLAN ID". 0–4094 Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN Priority*1*2
To set the Interval time for LLDP
INTERVAL
Select "LLDP (Secondary)". Press SP-PHONE. Select "LLDP (Interval)". Press SP-PHONE. 1–3600
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
and can then be
Press HOLD three Press STORE.

times to return to the
Menu screen.
Note

*1
The VLAN ID and the VLAN priority are set automatically for the primary port; these are reference only. However, the VLAN ID and
the VLAN priority for secondary port must be set manually.
*2
the priority.

5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters

Differentiated Services (DiffServ, or DS) is an IP-based QoS technique used to control QoS of VoIP
communications by setting the DS field in the header of IP packets. Consult your network administrator for the
appropriate setting values for the DS field.
Follow the procedure below to set the Diffserv parameters. Only KX-NT300 series IP-PTs, KX-NT500 series
IP-PTs, and KX-NT265 IP-PTs can be used to set the parameters.
SETUP
Press "SETUP" Select "Qos". ENTER Select "Diffserv". ENTER

To set the DS field value for the primary port
Select "Primary Port". ENTER Select "Enable". ENTER
Diffserv
0.0–7.7 ENTER
To set the DS field value for the secondary port (only for KX-NT300 series)
Return to the Select ENTER Select "Enable".

Diffserv setting screen. "Secondary Port (TO PC)".
Diffserv
ENTER 0.0–7.7 ENTER
To end programming

and can then be
Menu screen.
Note

Press PROGRAM while Select "QoS". Press SP-PHONE. Select "Diffserv". Press SP-PHONE.
"Searching" is displayed.
To set the DS field value for the primary port
Select "Primary Port". Press SP-PHONE. Select "DS (Enable)". Press SP-PHONE.
Diffserv
0.0–7.7 Press SP-PHONE.
To set the DS field value for the secondary port (only for KX-NT300 series)
Press HOLD to return to Select "Secondary Port". Press SP-PHONE. Select "DS (Enable)".
the Diffserv setting screen.
Diffserv
Press SP-PHONE. 0.0–7.7 Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming

and can then be
Press HOLD until the
Menu screen is displayed. Press STORE.
Note
For KX-NT511 Users

VOL VOL
PROG.
Press PROGRAM while Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE.
"Searching" is displayed. select "QoS". select "Diffserv".
To set the DS field value
VOL
Diffserv
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. 0.0–7.7 Press SP-PHONE.

select "DS (Enable)".
To end programming
HOLD
and can then be
Press HOLD until the
Menu screen is displayed Press STORE.

5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports

A KX-NT300 series IP-PT user, KX-NT500 series IP-PT user, or KX-NT265 IP-PT user can configure the port
number of PTAP, DHCP, and FTP ports. Consult your network administrator to check whether the configuration
of the IP ports is required.
Follow the procedure below to configure the port number of the IP ports.
Note
• If you wish to change the port number back to default, enter 0 as the port number for the desired port.
• To delete 1 character, use "CLEAR" for KX-NT300 series IP-PTs and KX-NT500 series IP-PTs, or use
[TRANSFER] for KX-NT265, KX-NT321, KX-NT511 and KX-NT551.

SETUP
Password
Press "SETUP" Select "IP Port". ENTER 7678 ENTER
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports

*1
Select "PTAP Server Port". ENTER Select "Primary PBX". ENTER
Port No.
1024–65535 ENTER
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports for the Secondary PBX*2
Select "PTAP Server Port". ENTER Select "Secondary PBX". ENTER
Port No.
1024–65535 ENTER
Port No.
Return to the Select ENTER 1024–65535 ENTER

Menu screen. "PTAP Client Port".
To configure the port number of DHCP Ports
Port No.
Select "DHCP Server Port". ENTER 67, 1024–65535 ENTER
Port No.
Select "DHCP Client Port". ENTER 68, 1024–65535 ENTER

To configure the port number of FTP Ports
Port No.
Select "FTP Server Ctrl Port". ENTER 21, 1024–65535 ENTER
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Ctrl Port". ENTER 1024–65535 ENTER
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Data Port". ENTER 1024–65535 ENTER
To end programming

and can then be
Menu screen.
*1
For KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
*2
Note

Password
Press PROGRAM while Select "IP Port". Press SP-PHONE. 7678 Press SP-PHONE.
Select "PTAP Server". Press SP-PHONE. Select "Primary PBX". Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE. Press HOLD.
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports for the Secondary PBX (if required)
Select "PTAP Server". Press SP-PHONE. Select "Secondary PBX". Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE. Press HOLD.
Port No.
Select "PTAP Client". Press SP-PHONE. 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "DHCP Server". Press SP-PHONE. 67, 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "DHCP Client". Press SP-PHONE. 68, 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.

Port No.
Select "FTP Server Ctrl". Press SP-PHONE. 21, 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Ctrl". Press SP-PHONE. 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Data". Press SP-PHONE. 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming

and can then be
to the Menu screen.
Note
For KX-NT511 Users

VOL
PROG.
Password
Press PROGRAM while Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. 7678 Press SP-PHONE.
"Searching" is displayed. select "IP Port".

VOL
Port No.
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.

select "PTAP Server".
VOL
Port No.

select "PTAP Client".

VOL
Port No.
Press VOLUME to Press SP-PHONE. 67, 1024–65535 Press SP-PHONE.

select "DHCP Server".
VOL
Port No.

select "DHCP Client".

VOL
Port No.

select "FTP Server Ctrl".
VOL
Port No.

select "FTP Client Ctrl".
VOL
Port No.

select "FTP Client Data".
To end programming
HOLD
and can then be
to the Menu screen.

5.7.6 ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only)

ECO mode allows a KX-NT500 series IP-PT to consume less power than in normal mode.
To start ECO mode, follow the procedure below.
KX-NT553/KX-NT556
SETUP
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP" Select "ECO Mode". ENTER Select "On".
To end programming
STORE The IP-PT will reboot in

ECO mode.

Menu screen.
KX-NT511/KX-NT551
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM while Select "ECO Mode". Press SP-PHONE. Select "On".
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot in

ECO mode.
Press HOLD to return to Press "STORE".

the Menu screen.
Notice
• When a KX-NT500 series IP-PT is in ECO mode, the following limitations are applied:
– The second Ethernet port is disabled.
– The port of the switching hub to which the telephone is connected must be 10 Mbps (Fixed)/full
duplex.
• For KX-NT500 series IP-PTs (software version V1.010 or later), you can specify the connection mode
(Auto Negotiation, 10 Mbps/full duplex, 10 Mbps/half duplex, 100 Mbps/full duplex, 100 Mbps/half
duplex). If a connection with Auto Negotiation fails, the connection will be made in either 10 Mbps/half
duplex or 100 Mbps/half duplex.
Note

To exit from ECO mode, turn off the KX-NT500 series IP-PT, and then follow the procedure below.
KX-NT553/KX-NT556
SETUP
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP" Select "ECO Mode". ENTER Select "Off".
To end programming
STORE The IP-PT will reboot in

normal mode.

Menu screen.
KX-NT511/KX-NT551
Supply power
to the IP-PT
Press PROGRAM while Select "ECO Mode". Press SP-PHONE. Select "Off".
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot in

normal mode.
Press "STORE".
Press HOLD to return to
the Menu screen.
Note

5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
5.8 Registering IP Telephones

After the programming of the PBX and IP telephones is finished (refer to "5.7 Assigning Networking Information
to IP Telephones"), the IP telephones must be registered to the PBX. The procedure for registering IP
telephones differs according to the IP terminal registration mode specified during the Easy Setup Wizard. The
IP Terminal Registration Mode and IP-CS Registration Mode settings can be changed in the Site
Property—Main screen of the Web Maintenance Console (refer to "9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main" in the PC Programming Manual). Refer to the following
table:
IP Terminal Registration Mode/IP-CS Registration Mode

IP Terminals
Extension Number
Full Automatic Mode Manual Mode
Input Mode
IP-PTs ü ü ü
KX-UT Series SIP
ü ü*1 ü
Phones
Non-KX-UT series SIP
ü*2 ü*2 ü
phones
IP-CSs*3 ü – ü
ü: Available
*1
KX-UT series SIP phones will be registered automatically, in the same way as Full Automatic mode.
*2
Non-KX-UT series SIP phones must always be registered to the PBX manually, even if Full Automatic mode or Extension Number
Input mode is selected.
*3
For details about registering IP-CSs, refer to the Installation Guide for the IP-CS.
Note
• For KX-UT series SIP phones, the SIP extension password is automatically set to "1234".
• For IP softphones, follow the same registration procedure as IP-PTs.
Full Automatic Mode

If networking settings have been completed, when IP-PTs, KX-UT series SIP phones, or IP-CSs are connected
to the same network as the PBX, they will be registered automatically. No registration procedure is required.
Extension Number Input Mode

For IP-PTs
If networking settings have been completed, when IP-PTs are connected to the same network as the PBX,
they will be registered automatically, but extension numbers for the IP-PTs will not be set. Follow the procedure
below to register an extension number to complete registration.
1. After completing networking settings, connect the IP-PT to the same network as the PBX. The screen to
enter the extension number is displayed on the IP-PT.

2. Enter an extension number.

Note
When no extension number is entered in this step, the process will time out and the IP-PT will be
registered without an extension number.
3. Press [ENTER]*1 on the IP-PT.
4. Press [PAUSE]*2 or "EXIT" on the IP-PT.
*1
For KX-NT551/KX-NT321 users, press [AUTO DIAL/STORE].
For KX-NT511 users, press [CONF/STORE].
For models other than the above models that do not have the applicable buttons, consult your dealer.
*2
For KX-NT511 users, go off-hook, and then go on-hook.
For KX-UT Series SIP Phones

If networking settings have been completed, when KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the same
network as the PBX, they will be registered automatically as same as when they are registered in Full Automatic
mode. No registration procedure is required.
Note
• No more than 64 IP-PTs can register extension numbers at the same time.
• If an extension number that is input for an IP-PT has already been set to another extension, registration
by this mode will fail.
Note that some extension numbers are pre-configured to other extensions by default. Avoid using such
numbers, or delete them before starting the registration process.
Manual Mode
For IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones
After connecting IP-PTs or KX-UT series SIP phones to the PBX over a network, register those IP terminals
to the PBX manually.
Follow the procedure below for registration.
c. For IP-PTs:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card).
For KX-UT series SIP phones:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card
(Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
To register the IP-PT or KX-UT series SIP phone by entering the MAC address directly:

2. If the Connection column for the port is INS, click INS,

and then click OUS on the dialogue box to change the
port’s status.
3. Enter the MAC address of the IP-PT or SIP phone in the
IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) cell.
4. Click Apply.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully registered,
its status will update to show "Registered".
5. In the Connection column for the port, click OUS, and
then click INS on the dialogue box to change the port’s
status.
6. For KX-UT series SIP phones only:
Follow the procedure below to change the IP Terminal
Registration Mode from Manual to Full Automatic.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot ® System Property ®
Site ® Main.
b. In the Main tab, select Full Automatic for IP
Terminal Registration Mode.
c. Click OK.
To register the IP-PT or KX-UT series SIP phone using the wizard:
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available)
extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. a. Highlight numbers and names and click the right
arrow to select them for registration, and then click
Next.
b. Click Next. A screen will appear with information on
the current IP-PT or SIP phone extension number
and name, and index number for programming.
Note
• If the IP-PT or SIP phone has been
connected to the LAN and power has been
turned on, the IP address of the PBX will be
assigned automatically.
• If not, connect the IP-PT or SIP phone to the
LAN and turn the power on within 15 minutes
after this operation is done. The IP address
of the PBX will then be assigned
automatically.
c. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box
will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will
show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully
registered, its status will update to show
"Registered".

For Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones

After connecting non-KX-UT series SIP phones to the PBX over a network, register those IP terminals to the
PBX manually.
Follow the procedure below for registration.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card).
2. Assign extension numbers to the SIP extensions.

• If the Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension
Card feature is enabled, the extension numbers of
SIP extension are automatically assigned. To
programme this feature, refer to "9.36 PBX
Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option—
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension
Number Set for Extension Card" in the PC
Programming Manual.
• If not, enter the extension number for each SIP
extension manually.

3. Set passwords for the SIP extensions.

a. Click the cell in the Connection column for each SIP
extension you wish to register. The Command
Connection screen appears.
b. Click OUS.
c. Enter a password in the Password cell for each SIP
extension.
d. Click Apply.
e. Click the cell in the Connection column for each SIP
extension to which a password has been assigned.
The Command Connection screen appears.
f. Click INS.
g. Click OK.
Note
• Alternatively, it is possible to set an extension
number as a password for each SIP extension
automatically.
• In order to set the password automatically, do
the following in substitution for step c of the
procedure above.
a. Click Copy to. A screen will appear with
information on assigned extension numbers
for SIP extensions.
b. Click Select All.
c. Click Execute to copy each Extension
Number to Password.
d. Click Yes.
e. Click OK to return to the Port Property
screen.
• When copying extension numbers to
passwords, you can also use the icon on the
bottom left of the Virtual SIP Extension Port
Property screen.

4. Programme the SIP extension you wish to register.

a. Set the IP address of the PBX, extension number,
and password in the corresponding fields for your
SIP extension.
b. Send a request from the SIP extension to the PBX
for registration.
• If the authentication information of the SIP
extension and the PBX match, the registration is
successful.
Note
• When programming the SIP extension, the
names of the corresponding fields may differ
depending on the type of SIP phone you are
using.
• For details about the actual operation of SIP
phones, refer to the documentation of the SIP
phone.
• For certain SIP phones, you may need to set a
Sign-in name, which should consist of the
extension number and the IP address of the PBX
(e.g., 350@192.168.0.101).

5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones

Note
For details about de-registering IP-CSs, refer to the documentation for the IP-CS.
De-registration of IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones

1. Make sure the IP Terminal Registration Mode is set to
Manual.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot ® System Property ®
Site ® Main.
b. In the Main tab, select Manual for IP Terminal
Registration Mode.
c. Click OK.
c. For IP-PTs:
3. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
arrow to select them for de-registration.
b. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
c. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue
box will show "De-registration succeed!".
d. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP telephone will update to show
"None".

Forced De-registration of IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones

Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register an IP-PT when normal de-registration was unsuccessful.
c. For IP-PTs:
2. Click Forced De-registration.

A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
arrow to select them for de-registration.
b. Click Next.
c. Click OK.
d. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue
box will show "Forced de-registration succeed!".
e. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP telephone will update to show
"None".

De-registration of Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones

The de-registration of non-KX-UT series SIP phones is carried out by deleting either the extension number or
password registered in the PBX.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card).
2. a. Click the cell in the Connection column for the port

of the SIP phone to de-register.
b. In the Command window, click OUS to change the
status of the port to "OUS".
3. Repeat step 2 for each SIP phone to de-register.
4. Delete either the extension number or password for the
SIP phone to de-register, as shown here.
5. Click OK.

5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site

If an SBC (Session Border Controller) is present on the same local network as the KX-NS500, you can install
SIP phones at remote sites without needing to configure special network settings (NAT traversal, etc.).
This section provides information about the procedure for connecting SIP Phones at a remote site that has
SBC hardware.
When SIP phones in remote sites use the internet to communicate with the PBXs, use the HTTPS protocol for
security. If the connection is within a VPN and protected, you may use the HTTP protocol.
Internet
Main Unit*1 Switching Hub Switching Hub
Router Router
IP-PT SBC KX-UT series

SIP phone
Main Site (Headquarters) Remote Site
: RTP packets
*1
KX-NS500
Note
• Install the SBC in the same LAN as the KX-NS500.
• A KX-NS500 can work with only one SBC. Also, multiple sites can share an SBC.
• A KX-NS500 can support up to 20 remote extensions at the same time via SBC when using the HTTPS
protocol.
• All the RTP packets in between the main site and the remote site is routed to the SBC for security and
for IP address conversion.
• When settings of remote extensions being used at remote sites are changed at the KX-NS500 at the
main site, the reflection of the changes to the remote extension may require some time due to data
transfer protocols.
Programming the KX-NS500

Follow the procedures below to configure remote port settings using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For the procedures below, program WAN side IP information of the router at the main site.
This information is sent to KX-UT series SIP phones at the remote site after completing all programming.
For Site Property Settings

1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
2. Move the mouse pointer over System Property.
3. Click Site.
4. Click the SIP Extension tab.
5. Click Advanced Setting for Remote SIP-MLT.
Program the WAN side IP information in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT.

a. Program the following common settings.

Configure the following items in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT.
WAN Side IP information of
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
the router at the main site
CWMP
IP Address NAT - CWMP Server IP Address

SIP
IP Address NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address

Port Number NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
NTP
IP Address NAT - NTP Server IP Address

Port Number NAT - NTP Server Port No.
b. Programme the following settings according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the
remote site.
When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS

CWMP
Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.

For Data Download
Port Number NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP

CWMP
Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.

For Data Download
Port Number NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.

6. Click OK.
9. Click Site.
10. Click Port Number tab.
11. Programme the following items according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote
site.
a. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
• CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
b. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:
• CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
Note
For the default port numbers of the KX-NS500, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
12. Click OK.
13. Make a backup of the data that includes the above settings.
Click Setup ® System Control ® System Reset ® Backup.
Using a KX-NS500 as an NTP server

When the KX-NS500 will be used as a NTP server, follow the procedures below.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® NTP.
2. Select Enable.
3. Click OK.
Programming the SBC

The following items need to be configured on the SBC. For information about configuring the SBC, refer to the
documentation of the SBC.
• IP address of the KX-NS500
• Port numbers of the KX-UT series SIP phones installed in the remote site
• IP address and subnet mask of the SBC
• LAN side IP address of the router at the main site
• WAN side IP address of the router at the main site
• SIP receiving port settings (For details, refer to the documentation of your SBC)
Note
For SIP receiving port of the SBC, specify the same port number that is specified at NAT - SIP Proxy
Server Port No. in step 5 in "Programming the KX-NS500" in this section.
• RTP Start Port (UDP) and RTP End Port (UDP)
Note
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and RTP End Port (UDP) specified for the SBC above are in the
range of the RTP port numbers that KX-NS500 uses.
For range of RTP port number of KX-NS500 , refer to "Port Numbers for Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port
Security".
• Firewall settings to allow SIP packets and RTP packets

Programming the router at the main site

Port forwarding settings (Router – SBC)
Configure the following items for port forwarding in between the SBC and the router.
Application LAN Side Port Number WAN Side Port Number
SIP Proxy NAT-SIP Proxy Port No. NAT-SIP Proxy Port No.
(Use the same value as NAT - SIP (Use the same value as NAT - SIP
Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the KX-NS500".) "Programming the KX-NS500".)
RTP (UDP) Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No. Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the (Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the range of the RTP ports that the
KX-NS500 uses.) KX-NS500 uses.)
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and the RTP End Port (UDP) specified
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the KX-NS500 uses. For
the range of RTP port numbers that the KX-NS500 uses, refer to "Port
Numbers for Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".
Note
For information about configuring port forwarding on the router, refer to the documentation of the router.
Port forwarding settings (Router – KX-NS500)

Configure the following items for port forwarding between the KX-NS500 and the router.
CWMP
HTTP CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 11 of (Use the same value as in step 5 of
HTTPS CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
SIP-MLT Data
HTTP Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
Port No. for SIP-MLT (HTTP) Port No.
HTTPS Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
Port No. for SIP-MLT (HTTPS) Port No.

NTP 123*1 NAT - NTP Server Port No.

(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the KX-NS500".)
*1
The port number for NTP that the KX-NS500 uses is fixed to 123.
Note
For information about configuring port forwarding on the router, refer to the documentation of the router.
Installing KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site

There are 2 methods to install KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site:
• Set up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site using the KX-NS500, and then send them to the remote
site.
• Set up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting them to the KX-NS500 at the main site, and then send
them to the remote site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site, and then sending them to remote site
1. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Program the settings for the KX-UT series SIP phones.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
e. Click Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Select a protocol (HTTP/HTTPS) for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT.
Note
When a SIP phone at remote site uses the internet to communicate with a KX-NS500 , use the
HTTPS protocol for security. If the connection is on VPN and protected, you may use the HTTP
protocol.
• Change the value to Remote (SBC) for Phone Location.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the KX-UT series SIP phone, and then plug it in again to reboot the KX-UT series
SIP phone manually.
The KX-UT series SIP phone will download settings automatically.
Note
• After downloading the setting information for the remote site, the KX-UT series SIP phone will not
connect to the KX-NS500 if it is connected to the LAN at the main site. After some time, the
KX-UT series SIP phone will display "9002: Connection Failed".
• Depending on the settings of your router, the KX-UT series SIP phone may connect to the PBX. In
such cases, proceed to step 4.
4. Send the KX-UT series SIP phone to the remote site and connect it to the LAN in the remote site.
Note
The KX-UT series SIP phone is already registered to the KX-NS500 and programmed with the remote
site configuration. There is no operation required for the KX-UT series SIP phone at the remote site.

Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting to the KX-NS500 at the main site, and
then sending them to the remote site
1. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
2. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
3. Select the config file according to the protocol used and then download it to your PC.
• HTTP is used
– UT_ACS_xxyyy.cfg
• HTTPS is used
– UT_ACS_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg
Note
*1
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
*2
4. Download the config file to the KX-UT series SIP phone via the Web user interface of the KX-UT series
SIP phone.
For details, refer to "When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)" in
5. Connect the KX-UT series SIP phone to the LAN at the remote site.
6. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone to the KX-NS500 as a remote extension.
b. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
c. Click Port Property.
d. Click Remote Place tab.
e. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (SBC) for Phone Location.
• Change the value to Enable for Web-MC Ability.
Note
Select the same value as you selected for NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the KX-NS500" in this section.
f. Click OK.
Note
• You can select HTTPS for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT only when Phone Location is set as
Remote (SBC).
• If the KX-UT series SIP phones don't work normally, confirm if the KX-UT series SIP phones are able
to access to internet.

5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media

Relay Gateway
The PBX contains a built-in Media Relay Gateway. You can install and register IP-PTs (KX-NT500 series),
Panasonic IP-Softphones, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), KX-UT series SIP phones and third party SIP phones
at a remote site without adding an SBC (Session Border Controller). Also, you do not need to configure special
network settings (NAT traversal, etc.) at the remote site.
Internet
PBX Switching Hub
Switching Hub
Built in Media Router Router
Relay Gateway
IP-PT KX-UT
PC IP-PT series
SIP phone
Main Site Remote Site
: LAN
: WAN
Note
• This feature does not require an activation key.
• There is no limit to the number of terminals that can use the Media Relay Gateway feature.
However, there are some conditions, as follows:
– Peer-to-peer communication is not supported for the built-in Media Relay Gateway.
– The number of terminals using TR-069 (CWMP)-based HTTPS is limited.
• For information about which telephone models support the built-in Media Relay Gateway, consult your
dealer.
Programming the PBX with Built-in Media Relay Gateway

Follow the procedures below to configure remote port settings using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For the procedures below, program WAN side IP information of the router at the main site. This information
is sent to KX-NT500 series, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), or KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote site after
completing all programming.
For Site Property Settings

3. Click Site.
4. Click the Media Relay tab.

5. Programme the WAN side information in Media Relay tab.

a. Programme the following common settings in Common.
WAN Side IP information of the router at
the main site
IP Address NAT - External IP Address*1
*1
You can also programme individual items of the NAT - External IP Address. For more details, see step e.
b. Programme the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-NT500 series IP extensions
and IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) in the remote site. Configure the following items in IP Extension /
IP-CS.
the main site
MGCP
Port Number NAT - MGCP Server Port No.

Port Number (for IP-CS [KX-NS0154 only]) NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
FTP
Port Number NAT - FTP Server Port No.
c. Programme the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-UT series IP extensions
and SIP extensions in the remote site. Configure the following items in SIP Extension / UT
Extension.
the main site
SIP
Port Number NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
d. Programme the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-UT series IP extensions in
the remote site. Configure the following items in UT Extension.
– When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
the main site
CWMP
Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.

Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for
Network Survivability
For Data Download


the main site
Port Number NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
(HTTPS) Port No.
– When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:

the main site
CWMP
Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.

Port Number NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for
For Data Download
Port Number NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server

(HTTP) Port No.
e. Programme the following common settings in Option.

the main site
RTP
IP Address NAT - RTP IP Address

SIP
IP Address NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address

CWMP
IP Address NAT - CWMP Server IP Address

IP Address NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for
NTP
IP Address NAT - NTP Server IP Address
If necessary, you can program the individual settings here and overwrite the NAT - External IP
Address setting programmed in step a.
6. Click OK.


9. Click Site.
10. Click the Port Number tab.
11. Programme the following items according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote
site.
a. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
• CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
b. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:
• CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
Note
For the default port numbers of the PBX, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
12. Click OK.
Using the PBX as an NTP server

When the PBX will be used as an NTP server, follow the procedures below.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® NTP.
2. Select Enable.
3. Click OK.
Programming the router at the main site with Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Port forwarding settings (Router – PBX)
Configure the following items for port forwarding between the Media Relay Gateway and the router.
For the KX-NT500 series:
PTAP Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server) (Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual (refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] "9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-SIPEXT") Property—V-SIPEXT")
MGCP Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
(Server) (Use the same value as in step 5 of
(refer to PC Programming Manual "Programming the PBX with Built-in
"9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Media Relay Gateway".)
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-SIPEXT")

range of the RTP ports that the PBX range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1 uses.)*1
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*1
FTP The port number used for the FTP NAT - FTP Server Port No.
protocol. This is used for software (Use the same value as in step 5 of
updates. "Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
*1
The port number ranges must be within the range of RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal (16000–18047).
Up to 2 IP addresses can be assigned to the KX-NS500’s optional DSP cards. The following example shows the port number ranges
set for each IP address:
For the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only):
PTAP Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server) (Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual (refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] "9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-IPCS") Property—V-IPCS")
MGCP Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for
(Server) IP-CS
(refer to PC Programming Manual (Use the same value as in step 5 of
"9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] "Programming the PBX with Built-in
Configuration—Slot—Card Media Relay Gateway".)
Property—V-IPCS")
range of the RTP ports that the PBX range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1 uses.)*1
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*1
FTP The port number used for the FTP NAT - FTP Server Port No.
protocol. This is used for software (Use the same value as in step 5 of
updates. "Programming the PBX with Built-in
*1

For the KX-UT series:
SIP Proxy UDP Port No. for SIP Extension NAT-SIP Proxy Port No.
Server (Use the same value as NAT - SIP
(refer to PC Programming Manual Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] "Programming the PBX with Built-in
Configuration—Slot—System Media Relay Gateway")
Property—Site—Port Number")
CWMP
HTTP CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port
SIP-MLT No.
"Programming the PBX with Built-in "Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".) Media Relay Gateway".)
HTTPS CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port
SIP-MLT No.
SIP-MLT Data
HTTP Data Transmission Protocol Data Transmission Protocol

(HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
HTTPS Data Transmission Protocol NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download
(HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT Server (HTTPS) Port No.
NTP 123*1 NAT - NTP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
range of the RTP ports that the range of the RTP ports that the
KX-NS500 uses.)*2 KX-NS500 uses.)*2
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the KX-NS500 uses. For
the range of RTP port numbers that the KX-NS500 uses, refer to "Port
Numbers for Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*2
*1
The port number for NTP that the KX-NS500 uses is fixed to 123.
*2

Up to 2 IP addresses can be assigned to the KX-NS500’s optional DSP cards. The following example shows the port number ranges
set for each IP address:
Installing KX-NT500 series IP-PTs at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
You can install KX-NT500 series IP-PTs at the remote site directly or from the local site as follows.
1. Register the IP-PT. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Programme the settings for the IP-PT.
b. Click Virtual ® V-IPEXT32.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card (Virtual IP Extension Card).
e. Click the Remote Place tab.
• Change the value to Remote (MRG) for Phone Location.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the IP-PT, and then plug it in again to reboot the IP-PT manually. The IP-PT will
download settings automatically.
Installing IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
You can install IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) at the remote site directly or from the local site as follows.
1. Register the IP-CS. For details, refer to corresponding manuals of KX-NS0154.
2. Programme the settings for the IP-CS.
b. Click Virtual ® V-IPCS4.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPCS4 card (Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card).
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the IP-CS, and then plug it in again to reboot the IP-CS manually. The IP-CS
will download settings automatically.
Installing KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
There are 2 methods to install KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site:
• Set up the phones at the main site using the KX-NS500, and then send them to the remote site.
• Set up the phones without connecting them to the KX-NS500 at the main site, and then send them to the
remote site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site, and then sending them to remote site
1. Register the phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Programme the settings for the phone.

b. Click Virtual ® V-UTEXT32.

Note
When a SIP phone at a remote site uses the internet to communicate with a KX-NS500, use
the HTTPS protocol for security. If the connection is on a VPN and is protected, you may use
the HTTP protocol.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the phone, and then plug it in again to reboot the phone manually. The phone
will download settings automatically.
Note
• After downloading the setting information for the remote site, the KX-UT series SIP phone will not
connect to the KX-NS500 if it is connected to the LAN at the main site. After some time, the
KX-UT series SIP phone will display "9002: Connection Failed".
• Depending on the settings of your router, the KX-UT series SIP phone may connect to the PBX. In
this case, proceed to step 4.
4. Send the KX-UT series SIP phone to the remote site and connect it to the LAN in the remote site.
Note
The KX-UT series SIP phone is already registered to the KX-NS500 and programmed with the remote
site configuration. No operation is required for the KX-UT series SIP phone in the remote site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting to the KX-NS500 at the main site, and
then sending them to the remote site
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
2. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
3. Select the config file according to the protocol used and then download it to your PC.
• If HTTPS is used:
– UT_MRG_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg
Note
*1
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
*2
4. Download the config file to the KX-UT series SIP phone via the Web user interface of the KX-UT series
SIP phone. For details, refer to "When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)" in
5. Connect the KX-UT series SIP phone to the LAN in the remote site.
6. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone to the KX-NS500 as a remote extension.
b. Click Virtual ® V-UTEXT32.

• Change the value to Enable for Web-MC Ability.
Note
Select the same value as you selected for NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in Media Relay Gateway" in this section.
g. Click OK.
Note
• You can select HTTPS for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT only when Phone Location is set as
Remote (MRG).
• If the KX-UT series SIP phone does not work normally, confirm whether the KX-UT series SIP
phone can access the internet.

5.9 Configuration of Users

The system manages information about each user.
Before programming other user settings, the following information must be configured for each user:
• Extension number
• Name
• Unified Messaging mailbox
• Web Maintenance Console login account (ID and password)
Follow the procedure below to efficiently programme basic personal information by adding multiple users with
the Add Range feature.
Add one or more extension cards to the system, according to your equipment and needs. Extension
numbers will be automatically created for each extension card that is added. For details about adding
extension cards, refer to "9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot" in the PC Programming
Manual.
2. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension.
Enter an extension name for each extension number to be used. For details, refer to the following sections
in the PC Programming Manual:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
Note
You also can import extension names from a CSV file. For details refer to "6.6 Tool—Import" in the
PC Programming Manual.
Select Rule of copy to extension name on the Option tab.
• Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
• Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]
You can create multiple user profiles automatically by using the Add Range feature for extension numbers.
You can also set an extension number, first name, last name, Unified Messaging mailbox, and Web
Maintenance Console login account for each user manually.
For details, refer to "User Controls" in "8.1 Users—User Profiles" in the PC Programming Manual.
For each user profile added using the Add Range feature, the following information is automatically
assigned:
• First Name/Last Name
Extension Name, which is the name displayed on extension LCDs, can be copied all at once to the
First Name and Last Name settings for each extension.
The format you selected in Rule of copy to extension name in step 3 determines how these are
copied.
– Case 1: You selected Rule-A, and the format of the name is assumed to be "[First Name] (space)
[Last Name]".
– Case 2: You selected Rule-B, and the format of the name is assumed to be "[Last Name], [First
Name]".
– Case 3: Extension Name is set to not follow Rule of copy to extension name:
Example of copying Extension Name
User Profile
Extension Name
First Name Last Name
Case 1 Tarou Yamada Tarou Yamada

User Profile
Extension Name
First Name Last Name
Case 2 Yamada,Tarou Tarou Yamada

Case 3 TarouYamada Ext. 101 TarouYamada
• Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")
5. If additional editing is required for users, settings can be configured on the following screens:
a. To edit user information: Setup ® Users ® User Profiles
b. To edit extension settings: Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension
c. To edit mailbox settings: Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings
Note
• You also can create mailboxes for Incoming Call Distribution Groups on the Mailbox
Settings screen.
• Since the Built-in Unified Messaging System is part of this PBX, the settings of the following
items are shared between the PBX and Unified Messaging system.
a. Date and time, and enable/disable settings in Holiday Table
The following 2 items are shared. For details, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
– 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
– 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
b. Mailboxes with the same mailbox number as their associated extension numbers
When the same mailbox number is used as the extension number, it is possible to select
whether the system keeps the two synchronised (i.e., one changes when the other does).
For details about the setting, refer to "10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System
Options—Option 9" in the PC Programming Manual.
For instance, when an extension number is changed, the mailbox number of the mailbox
assigned to that extension changes to match the new extension number. However, if a
mailbox with the same number already exists, the mailbox number will not change.
c. Mailbox COS
When assigning COS levels to user profiles (either extension or mailbox), by default the
extension COS and mailbox COS are set to the same level. You can specify whether these
values are synchronised by the system.
For details, refer to "10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option
9" in the PC Programming Manual.
If enabled, when one COS setting is changed, the other will change to match the new
setting. (When this setting is first enabled, the extension COS setting is used as the mailbox
COS.)
d. Since the outside line access number and trunk call (transfer) procedures are synchronised
in the PBX settings, each outside line access number (e.g., idle line access, trunk group
access, specified line access) are available for features that make calls (e.g., External
Message Delivery). These features will first recognise the outside line access number part
of a number, and then perform dial tone detection, etc.

5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice

Users with Unified Messaging (UM) mailboxes (referred to below as "subscribers") can receive their voice as
data using the following methods:
– Receiving attachments to a POP3 e-mail account
– Accessing data through an IMAP4 e-mail account
Note
KX-NSU201, KX-NSU205, KX-NSU210, KX-NSU220, or KX-NSU299 (Activation Key for Unified
Messaging E-mail Notification) is required to enable this feature for users.
For details about these activation keys, see "Unified Messaging System (Mailbox)" in "3.1.1 Type and
Maximum Number of Activation Keys".
Receiving Attachments to a POP3 E-mail Account

An e-mail can be sent to Unified Message system subscribers, notifying them of a new voice. Subscribers can
also choose to have the voice message attached to the notification, as well as choose to have the message
deleted from the system after it has been sent.
1. Specify SMTP server settings.
a. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® SMTP.
b. Specify the name to be used for the e-mail messages that will be sent from the system in Mail
sending—Mail sender information name.
c. Specify the e-mail address for the e-mail messages that will be sent from the system in Mail
sending—Mail Address.
d. Specify the IP address or host name of the SMTP server to use in SMTP server for relay—SMTP
server address.
e. Specify the port number of the SMTP server to use in SMTP server for relay—SMTP server Port
number.
f. Specify the following parameters if required.
– SMTP over TLS
– SMTP Authentication
– POP before SMTP
– Receive Port number (SMTP)
– Receive Port number (SMTPs)
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server
Feature—SMTP" in the PC Programming Manual.
g. Click OK.
2. Specify e-mail options.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® System Parameters ® Parameters ® E-mail Option.
b. Specify the following parameters.
– Mail Address (Up to 128 ASCII characters)
– Full Name (Up to 64 ASCII characters)
– Maximum Message Length (Selection)
– Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min)
c. Click OK.
3. Enable e-mail notification.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Class of Service ® General.
b. In E-mail Option, select Yes for all Class of Service members that will receive e-mail notifications.
c. Click OK.

4. Specify notification parameters.

a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings ® Notification Parameters.
b. Click Edit in E-mail/Text Message Device.
c. Specify the following parameters for Device No. 1, 2, and 3 as required.
– User name
– E-mail Address
– Only Urgent Messages
– Title Order
– Title String
– Call-back Number [0-9, *, #]
– Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– Attach Voice File
– Use Mode
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox
Settings—Notification Parameters" in the PC Programming Manual.
d. Click OK.
Accessing Data Through an IMAP4 E-mail Account

Downloading the IMAP Session Controller Software
When more than 24 users will be accessing data through IMAP4 e-mail accounts, each user must use the
IMAP Session Controller software.
The IMAP Session Controller software can be downloaded from Web Maintenance Console:
1. Log in with a User level account.
The Edit User screen is displayed.
2. Click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
Note
For details about installing and setting up the IMAP Session Controller software, refer to the User Manual.
Configuring IMAP Accounts

By configuring an IMAP account, subscribers can access the contents of their UM mailboxes through an e-mail
client. All that is necessary is an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
Once IMAP integration is programmed, users can do the following:
• Listen to voice messages
• Save voice data to their PCs
• Delete voice stored on the PBX
1. Enable IMAP integration.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Class of Service ® General.
b. In Desktop Messaging, select Yes for all Class of Service members that will use IMAP integration.
c. Click OK.
2. Specify the mailbox password.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings ® Mailbox Parameters.
b. Click Edit in Mailbox Password (Message Client).
c. Enter a password in Enter new password.
d. Enter the password again in Confirm new password.
e. Click OK.

f. Click OK.
3. Specify IMAP parameters.
a. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® IMAP4.
b. Specify the following parameters (if required).
– IMAP4 server
– Port Number
– IMAP4 over SSL
– CAPABILITY command
– Authenticated Connection Timeout
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server
Feature—IMAP4" in the PC Programming Manual.
c. Click OK.
Setting Up the IMAP Account in a Subscriber’s E-mail Client
An account must be set up in each subscriber’s e-mail client for use with the Unified Messaging system. The
setup procedure will vary depending on the e-mail client application used and the configuration of your network.
When adding the account, the settings must be specified as follows:
– The e-mail address will be the subscriber’s existing e-mail address.
– The type of the account must be set to "IMAP".
– The incoming mail server must be set as the IP Address of the PBX where the subscriber’s UM mailbox is
located.
– The user name/ID will be the subscriber’s UM Mailbox Number.
– The password will be the Mailbox Password (Message Client) set in step 2 above.
– A valid SMTP server must be used (i.e. the SMTP server used for existing mail accounts).
The following example setup procedure is for Microsoft Outlook® 2010. Subscribers’ e-mail client setting names
and locations may differ.
1. In Outlook 2010, select File, and then Info.
2. Click the Add Account button.
3. Select Manually configure server settings or additional server types.
4. Select Internet E-mail, and then click Next.
5. Configure the server settings as follows:
User Information
– In Your Name, enter the name of the subscriber. (In the example, "John Smith")
– In E-mail Address, enter the existing mail address of the subscriber. (In the example below,
"j.smith@example.com")
Server Information
– Select IMAP for Account type.
– In Incoming mail server, enter the IP address of the PBX where the subscriber’s UM mailbox is
located. (In the example below, "10.178.19.206")
– In Outgoing mail server (SMTP), enter the SMTP server used for the subscriber’s existing mail
account. (In the example below, "mail.example.com")
Logon Information
– In User Name, enter the subscriber’s Mailbox Number. (In the example below, "407")
– In Password, enter the password for the subscriber specified in Mailbox Password (Message Client).
6. Click Next and then complete the account settings.

Example IMAP Account Settings (Outlook 2010)

5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes

Mailboxes can be automatically created and associated with an extension number if these items do not already
exist. There are 2 modes for creating mailboxes. For each specified extension number, a mailbox is
automatically created if one is not already associated with the extension. The results of creating and associating
mailboxes and user profiles with extension numbers are output both to a file and to the syslog. If many
mailboxes must be created or deleted, the amount of time required to complete the task is displayed on the
screen.
Creating mailboxes for all extensions

Note
If a mailbox does not satisfy the conditions for automatic creation, neither will be created for the
corresponding extension.
1. In Web Maintenance Console, click Setup-UM Configuration-Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration-Create
all mailboxes
2. Click Execute.
• Mailboxes are created with the same number as the extension number.
• However, a mailbox will not be created in any of the following conditions:
a. A mailbox with the same number as the extension number already exists
b. The extension number has only 1 digit
c. The total number of mailboxes, including already existing mailboxes, exceeds 500
d. The extension number has wild cards used with MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) provided by
ISDN (e.g., 21X, 40XX)
Re-creating all mailboxes

IMPORTANT
This procedure deletes all existing voice data, all settings and all prompts from all mailboxes. In
this procedure, voice data (e.g., mailbox voice data, personal greetings) and settings (e.g., the password)
are not deleted from the managers' mailboxes. Be sure to make a backup of any important data beforehand.
If mailbox numbers are changed after mailboxes have been deleted using this feature, even if a backup of
the mailbox settings, voice data (e.g., personal greetings), and messages has been made, the data cannot
be restored. After executing this function, all messages will have been deleted, and it is necessary to
reconfigure all mailbox settings and re-record all prompts.
1. In Web Maintenance Console, click Setup®UM Configuration®Mailbox Settings®Auto
Configuration®Re-create all mailboxes
2. Select the radio button where you want the mailboxes to be created.
– Create mailboxes to the UM group of the PBX where the extensions belong to
– Create mailboxes to the specified UM group (UM Group No. 1 to 16)
3. Click Execute.
• Every type of mailbox, except the manager's mailboxes, will be deleted.
• If there are currently mailboxes in use, you can select whether to delete them forcibly or cancel the
operation.
• All mailboxes will be recreated.
• A mailbox will not be created in the following conditions:
– The extension number has only 1 digit

Results of creating mailboxes

The results of creating mailboxes are recorded in a text file. Follow the procedure below to view the file.
1. When automatic configuration completes, click OK on the "Mailbox create result" dialogue box.
2. Mailbox_result.txt is saved to the local PC.
3. The meaning of the status in the generated file is as follows:
User Profile Status Description
Exist The user profile already existed and was assigned to the related
mailbox and extension number.
Skipped The user profile was already assigned to the related mailbox and
extension number.
Mailbox Status Description

Created The new mailbox was successfully created.
Failed The new mailbox was not created.
Assigned The mailbox already existed, but was successfully assigned to the
related extension number.
Exist The mailbox was already assigned to the related extension
number.
Skipped The mailbox already existed, but assigning it to the related
extension number failed.
The start and finish times of the automatic configuration is recorded in the syslog (INFO). For details, refer
to "7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog" in the PC Programming Manual.

Section 6
Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
This section provides information about stacking

expansion units.

6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units

Stacking Expansion Units with the Main Unit allows you to expand the usage of legacy terminals and trunks.
When expansion units are stacked, the Main Unit will control communication, as well as all IP terminals on the
site.
Note
For details about connecting an expansion unit to a KX-NS500, refer to the 4.6.1 EXP-M Card
(KX-NS5130) in this manual.
There are 2 ways of stacking Expansion Units.
Case 1
Stacking Expansion Units to the Main Unit (not running).
To stack Expansion Units to a Main Unit which is not running currently, refer to "Procedure for Case 1 and
Case 2".
Case 2
Stacking Expansion Units to the Main Unit (running).
To stack expansion units to a PBX which is already running, refer to "Procedure for Case 1 and Case 2".
Stacking Procedures
The following procedures show how to stack expansion units in each case.
CAUTION
• When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off, and the
AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
Notice
If there is already an Expansion Unit stacked and connected to an EXP-M card installed in the Main Unit,
you can skip shutting down the Main Unit in the following procedures.
Note
• For information about starting the Main Unit for the first time, refer to "4.13 Starting the PBX".
• The Expansion Unit will be initialised when started up with an EXP-M card mounted and extension
numbers will be created automatically.
Procedure for Case 1 and Case 2

1. Follow the procedure below for the expansion unit.
a. Make sure the power switch is turned off. If the Main Unit is running, shutdown the Main Unit and then
turn off the power switch.
b. Connect the LAN cable to EXP-S card.
2. Follow the procedure below for the Main Unit.
a. Make sure the power switch is turned off.
b. Insert a EXP-M card into the EXP-M card slot.
c. Connect the LAN cable to EXP-M card.
3. Follow the procedure below for the Main Unit and Expansion Unit.
a. Turn the power switch on.

Pre-installing stacked Expansion units connected to the EXP-M card

Once an EXP-M card has been added to the physical shelf on the Slot screen, you can pre-install stacked
Expansion units connected to the EXP-M card.
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in
"5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
3. Place the mouse cursor over the EXP-M card, and in the menu that appears, click Pre-Install.
4. Select the Expansion unit connected to connection port 1 of the EXP-M card, and then click the arrow
button.
5. If a second stackable Expansion units is connected to connection port 2 of the EXP-M card, click the arrow
button.
6. Click OK when finished to complete pre-installation.
Programming Expansion unit

To programme Expansion Units that are stacked with the Main Unit, use Web Maintenance Console.
To log in to Web Maintenance Console, refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in "5.3 Starting
Web Maintenance Console".
For more information about programming Expansion unit, refer to the PC Programming Manual.


Section 7
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on the PBX and

telephone troubleshooting.

7.1.1 Installation
7.1 Troubleshooting
7.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION
You cannot make/receive • DSP card malfunction • Replace the corresponding card.
calls via an IP network.
• Mother board • Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
• Not enough activation • Purchase additional activation key codes.
keys Please consult a certified dealer for
details.
• Poor connection • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
• Make sure that none of the CAT 5/CAT 5e
cables in use are over 100 m in length.
• Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
• Network malfunction • Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
• Make sure that there is no unwanted
firewall in the IP network.
IP-PTs/SIP phones do not • DSP card malfunction • Replace the corresponding card.
operate.
• Mother board • Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
• Not enough activation • Purchase additional activation key codes.
keys Please consult a certified dealer for
details.
• IP-PT/SIP phone not • Register the corresponding IP-PT/SIP
registered phone.
• IP-PT/SIP phone • Replace the IP-PT/SIP phone.
malfunction
• Poor connection • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
are switched on.
• Make sure that the IP-PT/SIP phone is not
blocked by the firewall or other network
devices.

7.1.1 Installation
Extensions (except IP-PT/ • Extension card • Replace the corresponding card.

SIP phone) do not operate. malfunction
• Poor connection • Take the extension and plug it into the
between the PBX and same extension port using a short
the extension telephone cord. If the extension works,
then the connection between the PBX and
the extension must be repaired.
• A telephone with an • Make sure that a 2-wire cord is used.
A-A1 relay is • Make sure that the A-A1 relay switch of
connected. the telephone is in "OUT" or "OFF"
position.
• Extension malfunction • Take the extension and plug it into
another extension port that is working. If
the extension does not work, replace the
extension.
The PBX does not operate • Restart the PBX (refer to
properly. "7.1.5 Restarting the PBX").
• Turn off the power switch, and then turn it
back on.
• Turn off the power switch, and then
unplug the PBX. After 5 minutes, plug the
PBX back in, and turn the power switch
back on.
Noise on external paging. • Induced noise on the • Use a shielded cable as the connection
wire between the PBX wire between the PBX and amplifier. A
and the amplifier. short shielded cable is recommended.
Distorted external music. • Excessive input level • Decrease the output level of the external
from external music music source by using the volume control
source. on the music source.
The STATUS indicator on • A major system error • See the error log using Web Maintenance
the front of the cabinet turns occurs in the PBX. Console (refer to "7.1.6 Troubleshooting
on red. by Error Log").
The LINK indicator of the • Mother board • Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
mother board does not turn malfunction off the PBX when replacing).
on.
• Poor connection. • Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
are switched on.

7.1.1 Installation
The LED of the Expansion The LAN cable is not • Check the LAN cable connections.
Unit card is not green. connected properly.
There was a failure in the • Replace the stacking EXP-M card.
stacking card.

7.1.2 Connection
7.1.2 Connection
Connection between the PBX and an SLT:
CAUSE SOLUTION
Can you dial No
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2. Use the correct cord (the
an extension?
inner 2 wires are for T/R).
If a telephone equipped
T T with an A-A1 relay is
R R connected to the PBX, set
the A-A1 relay switch of the
PBX Extension telephone to "OFF".
Connection between the PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:

CAUSE SOLUTION
The "T" is connected to the "R". Reverse the connections of
the T/R.
Yes T T
R R
PBX Extension
Connection between the trunk and the PBX:

CAUSE SOLUTION
Trunk is connected to the T2/T1. Reconnect the trunk to the
T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
telephone jack using 2-
T2
R1 conductor wiring.
T1
Can you dial R2
No
out on a
trunk? Trunk PBX
Trunk is connected to the T2/R1.
T2
R1
T1
R2
Trunk PBX

7.1.3 Operation
7.1.3 Operation
Note
For devices connected to a PBX other than the Main Unit, refer to the Troubleshooting for that PBX.
• Cannot set the IP • An unusable value is • Set an IP address within the valid range.
address, subnet mask being set. IP address of the IP-PT/PBX: "1.0.0.0" to
address, and PBX IP "223.255.255.255" Subnet mask address:
address to the IP-PT. "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except
"0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
• Cannot register the • The necessary network • When not using the DHCP Server feature
IP-PT. parameters are not set or an external DHCP server, set the IP
to the IP-PT. address, subnet mask address, and enter
the PBX IP address. If necessary, also
enter the IP address of the default
gateway.
• When using the DHCP Server feature or
an external DHCP server, enter the PBX
IP address.
• The IP-PT cannot • The wrong IP address, • Check each parameter and enter the
connect to the PBX. subnet mask address, correct value.
PBX IP address, or
default gateway
address was entered.
• The Ethernet cable is • Check the Ethernet cable connections.
not connected
correctly.
• The DHCP server is not • Restart the external DHCP server.
active. • Confirm whether the DHCP Server feature
is enabled.
• Disable DHCP and re-enter settings as
appropriate.
• Whenever you try to • The status of the port • Change the port status from Out of
make calls using a SIP that the SIP phone is Service to In Service using Web
phone, a busy tone is connected to is Out of Maintenance Console.
heard. Service.
• The IP-PT does not • The ringer volume is off. • Turn on the ringer volume.
ring.
• Originating an outside • The corresponding • Programme the flexible button. Refer to
call, call transfer, or flexible button does not "2.21.1 Fixed Buttons" in the Feature
conference cannot be exist on the PT. Guide.
performed.
• The IP address of the - • You can check the current IP address by
PBX for networking has PT Programming.
been forgotten. For details, refer to the PT Programming
[991] in PT Programming Manual.

7.1.3 Operation
The status of the port • The telephone is Put the telephone on-hook and restart the
property of an SLT off-hook. PBX.
extension is FAULT.
Note
This solution does not apply to the power
failure ports (ports 1, 2 on the pre-installed
MCSLC card).
• There is a problem in Disconnect all cabling between the PBX and
the wiring. SLTs, and restart the PBX.
After restarting, if operation is normal, there is
probably a problem in the wiring or
connection. (For example, there might be a
short circuit in the switchboard or cabling.)
Note
This solution does not apply to the power
failure ports (ports 1, 2 on the pre-installed
MCSLC card).
• The SLT circuitry is Consult a certified dealer.
damaged.

7.1.4 Error Messages

When a major system error occurs, an error message is displayed on the IP-PT.
For IP-PTs with a single line display (e.g., KX-NT265), only an error code (i.e., ERR XXXX-XXXX) will be
displayed.
Error Message & IP-PT Activity Probable Cause Solution
ERR 1001-0000 • Sub CPU malfunction • Repair or replace the

HARDWARE ERROR IP-PT.
Displays error and stops operating.
ERR 1002-0000 • Sound hardware
HARDWARE ERROR malfunction
ERR 1003-0000 • Flash memory malfunction
HARDWARE ERROR
ERR 1004-XXXX • PHY (network control IC)
HARDWARE ERROR error
ERR 1005-0000 • SDRAM error
HARDWARE ERROR
ERR 1006-0000 • SRAM error
HARDWARE ERROR
ERR 1007-0000 • Sub CPU malfunction for
HARDWARE ERROR Self Labelling
ERR 1051-0000 • PBX software version error • Consult your network
SOFTWARE ERROR administrator.
ERR 2001-XXXX • Unexpected error • If this error is displayed
SYSTEM ERROR frequently, repair or
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds replace the IP-PT.
while starting up.
ERR 2002-0000 • Transmission error • Check with the network
POOR LAN CONNECTION administrator whether
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds there is a problem with the
while starting up. LAN.
ERR 2003-0000 • If this error is displayed
POOR LAN CONNECTION frequently, repair or
while starting up.

Error Message & IP-PT Activity Probable Cause Solution
ERR 2004-0000 • IP-PT not registered • Check the registration

UNREGISTERED TO SERVER status of the IP-PT.
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
ERR 2005-0000 • Connection refused by the
NO MORE CONNECTIONS PBX
while starting up.
ERR 2006-XXXX • IP address lease time from • Consult your network
DHCP SERVER REJECTION DHCP server has expired administrator.
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds • IP address lease renewal
while starting up. was refused by DHCP
server
ERR 2007-0000 • Communication error with • If this error is displayed
HARDWARE ERROR sub CPU frequently, repair or
while starting up.
ERR 2008-0000 • Sound hardware control
while starting up.
ERR 2009-XXXX • Error information from the • Consult your network
MGCP SERVER REJECTION PBX (MGCP server) administrator.
while starting up.
ERR 2010-0000 • Communication error with • If this error is displayed
HARDWARE ERROR sub CPU for Self Labelling frequently, repair or
while starting up.
ERR 3001-0000 • Communication error with
HARDWARE ERROR sub CPU
Displays error until reset the IP-PT.
ERR 3002-0000 • Sound hardware control
Displays error until reset the IP-PT.
ERR 3003-XXXX • IP address lease renewal • Consult your network
DHCP SERVER NOT FOUND was refused by DHCP administrator.
Displays error until reset the IP-PT. server
ERR 3100-0000 • Bluetooth hardware error • Repair or replace the
BLUETOOTH ERROR Bluetooth wireless
Resets the Bluetooth wireless headset. headset.

7.1.5 Restarting the PBX

If the PBX does not operate properly, restart the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. Before restarting the
PBX, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Note
• When the System Mode Switch is set to "NORMAL", restarting the PBX causes the following:
– Camp-on is cleared.
– Calls on hold are terminated.
– Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
– Calls in progress are terminated.
– Call park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.
• Be aware that restarting the PBX with the System Mode Switch in the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position
clears all data stored in the PBX. Do not perform this operation unless you intend to delete all data
from the PBX.
• When the PBX is set to obtain IP addressing information automatically, and the PBX is not able to
obtain appropriate IP addressing information from an external DHCP server, the PBX starts up with its
default IP addresses and the STATUS indicator on the front of the cabinet turns red. For the default IP
addresses, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
Operation
If the PBX does not operate properly:
1. Slide the System Mode Switch to the "NORMAL" position.
System Mode Switch
2. Start the Web Maintenance Console.

3. Log in using the Installer level account.
4. On the Home screen, click Maintenance ® System Control ® System Reset.
5. Follow the prompts.
Restarting the PBX will start.
Note
• When the power switch is turned on, or when the PBX recovers from a power failure, the PBX will
restart. The time required to restart depends on the number of connected extensions.

Example:
PBX Extensions Estimated Time for Starting Up
KX-NS500 128 KX-UT series SIP phones more than 5 minutes
• PBX functions cannot be used until restarting is complete. The use of a UPS is recommended; even
a momentary power failure can result in a long delay as the PBX restarts, requiring the time as shown
above.

7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log

When a major system error occurs in the PBX, the STATUS indicator on the front of the cabinet turns red, and
the system logs the error information.
Error Log Display Format

Below is the display format of the error log. For information about how to view the error log using Web
Maintenance Console, refer to "7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log" in the PC Programming Manual.
Example: Web Maintenance Console

3 7
1 2 4 5 6
Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

01/01/10 01:00AM MJ ALM #014 00 10000 FAN Alarm
01/01/10 01:39AM MN ALM #091 00 10000 PT connection over
1 2 3 4 5 6
Description
Item Description
1 Date The date of the error detection.

2 Time The time of the error detection.
3 Level Minor (MN ALM) Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major (MJ ALM) Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole
system, or result in system failure.
4 Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about
the error code, refer to item 7 in this table.

Item Description
5 Sub Code SMDR:

The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ).
For details about the contents of error sub codes, refer to

"7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log" in the PC Programming
Manual.
6 Error Message A description of the error.
7 Log Information Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF
format, as shown below.
[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions

For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.


Section 8
Networking Information
This section provides information about topics such as

using the PBX in a VoIP network, and the TCP ports
used by the PBX.

8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX
8.1 Information about Using an IP Network

This section explains common IP network information necessary for setting up QSIG networks.

This PBX supports Panasonic KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, and KX-NT265 IP proprietary telephones
(IP-PTs), Panasonic IP softphones, and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones (hardphones and softphones)
for communication on a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network. These IP telephones can be used as
extensions of the PBX when the local office LAN is connected to other LANs at different locations.
This PBX also enables VoIP communication with PBXs installed at different locations. Since the communication
does not take place over conventional telephone network, the high cost of long distance communication is
virtually eliminated.
To establish a VoIP network, the virtual cards are used according the requirement of the network. For details
about virtual cards, see "4.4 Virtual Cards".
The following diagrams illustrate VoIP network with (i) a remote office LAN and (ii) another PBX installed at
different location.
Note
Panasonic IP Cell Station (IP-CS) units are also supported by this PBX for communication on a VoIP
network. For details, refer to the Quick Installation Guide for the IP-CS.
(i) Connection Outline of VoIP Network with Remote Office LAN

Local Office LAN
SIP Phone
Extn. 102
Remote Office LAN

IP Softphone
Extn. 103
IP-PT
Extn. 101 IP Softphone
Extn. 105
Switching
Hub
SIP Phone
Extn. 106
PBX with IP-PT

V-IPEXT card/ Router Extn. 104
Switching
V-SIPEXT card Hub
DHCP Server
Router
Private
IP Network

(ii) Connection Outline of VoIP Network with PBX in Other Network

Router
Headquarters
PBX with
V-IPGW card
Switching Hub
Private IP Network
Router
PBX with
V-IPGW card
Switching Hub
Branch
Network Parameters
You will need to have the following IP addressing and QoS information to establish VoIP communication on
your network. This information is typically supplied by a network administrator.
Consult your network administrator for specific values.
Parameter Description
Identifies the location of IP telephones on the network. Each IP

IP telephone IP Address
telephone must have a unique IP address.
Defines which digits of an IP address are used for the network
address and the host address at each network location. The IP
Subnet Mask Address
addresses of the IP telephones and the PBX must fall within the same
subnet as that of the default gateway (e.g., router) of the LAN.
Identifies the IP address of the primary gateway (typically a router or
Default Gateway Address similar device) that exchanges IP packets with the other gateways on
the VoIP network.

Parameter Description
Identifies the location of the PBX in the network during VoIP

PBX IP Address
communications.
Identifies the ID of the logical segment within the corporate LAN,
VLAN ID through which voice packets from IP telephones travel. For details,
refer to "8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)".
Identifies the value for the DS field in the header of IP packets, which
DiffServ (DS) determines the priority given to packets travelling from IP telephones.
For details, refer to "5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters".
Types of IP Network
The speech quality depends on the type of IP network in use. Managed IP networks provide better speech
quality compared to unmanaged networks such as satellite communications, where quality of service cannot
be guaranteed.
Examples of recommended IP networks Not recommended
• Digital Leased Line • Satellite communications (Very Small Aperture
• IP-VPN (Virtual Private Network) Terminal system [VSAT], etc.)
• Frame Relay
Note
• Peer-to-peer calls between IP telephones installed at different locations may not be possible if packet
communication cannot be established between the respective networks. In this case, you need to
configure the network settings (e.g., a VPN router when using an IP-VPN) to establish packet
communication.
• Unlike an IP-VPN, which is set up over a network provider’s own IP network, an Internet VPN is set up
over the Internet. Internet VPNs are not recommended for VoIP communication because transmission
delays and loss of data are likely to occur.

8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server

To establish communication over a VoIP network, IP addresses must be assigned to IP telephones and the
PBX to identify their locations on the network. While these addresses can be assigned manually, it is also
possible to use a DHCP server to automatically assign IP address information. The PBX has a DHCP Server
feature. Therefore, the PBX can act as a DHCP server or DHCP client depending on its settings. When the
PBX’s DHCP Server feature is enabled, it allows you to centrally manage and automate the assignment of IP
addresses with Web Maintenance Console. For details, refer to " DHCP Server" in the PC Programming
Manual.
When the mother board is When an IP telephone is
connected to the network PBX
connected to the network
(DHCP Server
1 Request IP address feature enabled) 3 Request IP address
information information
2 Assign IP address
information to the
DSP card
DSP Card
4 Assign IP address
information to an IP IP Telephone
telephone
Note
• The DHCP Server feature is disabled by default. To enable the feature, refer to "5.4.2 Enabling the
DHCP Server Feature".
• An IP telephone and the mother board/DSP card cannot request IP addresses from a DHCP server on
another LAN (connected through an IP network). They can only receive IP addresses from a DHCP
server on the same LAN. Therefore, when IP telephones are located on several LANs, a DHCP server
is required on each LAN. If a DHCP server is not present on the LAN, IP addresses for IP telephones
and the mother board/DSP cards on that LAN must be assigned manually.
• When the PBX has been set to act as a DHCP client, use an external DHCP server to assign IP address
information automatically.
• When the PBX is set as the DHCP client and cannot receive appropriate IP addressing information
from an external DHCP server, the PBX keeps using the previous effective IP addressing information
and checks whether any overlapping of IP addresses exists. If the IP address of the PBX overlaps with
another IP address, the PBX displays a warning to encourage changing the IP address of the PBX.

8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)
8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)

VLANs are logical segments within a corporate LAN. By assigning VLAN settings to IP telephones, it is possible
to separate the packets transmitted by an IP telephone according to the type of data and specify which VLAN
each data type will be sent over. This allows you to avoid generating unnecessary network traffic on each
segment and to reduce the load on the network. As a consequence, speech quality can be assured. Therefore,
we recommend using the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication effectively.
Some IP telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series) are equipped with 2 ports, primary and secondary, for packet
communication. Allocating these ports to different VLANs enables you to split the paths for packets depending
on whether the packet contains voice signals or data.
VLAN settings (VLAN ID and VLAN priority) for the primary port affect voice data transmitted by the IP
telephone, whereas VLAN settings for the secondary port apply to data transmitted by a PC connected to the
IP telephone. When sending packets, the IP telephone can attach information on which VLAN the packets are
to be transmitted over (VLAN Tagging). The switching hub that receives these packets reads the VLAN
information and sends the packets over the appropriate VLAN. This helps to ensure bandwidth for IP telephone
voice transmissions.
In this way, an IP telephone with 2 ports can transmit voice packets from the primary port with higher priority
than other packets from the secondary port.
Notice
The PBX’s LAN port does not support VLAN tagging. Therefore, connect the PBX’s LAN port to a port of
the switching hub that is set to "Untagged", and the IP telephone to a port set to "Trunk", to allow VLAN
tagging. Consult your network administrator for details.
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
Segment for Voice Data Segment for Other Data
VLAN-capable Switching Hub
VLAN 1 VLAN 2
VLAN 1
Untagged
VLAN 2
PBX PC
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
Voice Packet
Other Packet
Other Packet
IP Telephone with 2 ports
PC
Primary Secondary

8.1.5 Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
Note
• This VLAN feature complies with IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.1Q.
• The PBX receives VLAN settings only from the connected switching hub. Therefore, VLAN settings for
the PBX must be assigned at the switching hub.
• When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the main unit is connected to a layer 2
switch that is IEEE 802.1Q compliant, and that is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of the
switching hub to which the card is connected must be set to "Untagged". Consult your network
• When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the switching hub to be connected is
IEEE 802.1Q compliant and is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of a switching hub that the
IP telephone is connected to must be set to "Trunk" port, to allow VLAN tagging. Consult your network
• Some PC LAN cards allow VLAN settings to be assigned. However, when using a PC connected to an
IP telephone with 2 ports, the VLAN settings for PC communications must be assigned only to the
secondary port of the IP telephone. Any VLAN settings assigned to the PC LAN card must be disabled.
These settings can usually be identified by "802.1Q", "802.1p", or "VLAN" in their name.
• If you are using an IP telephone with a primary port only (e.g., KX-NT265), a PC cannot be connected
to the IP telephone.
8.1.4 Jitter Buffer

When voice signals are packetised and transmitted, individual packets can take different paths through the
network and arrive at the destination at varied timings. This is referred to as "jitter", and it can cause degradation
in speech quality. To compensate for jitter problems, the "jitter buffer" accumulates the packets temporarily for
processing.
To set the size of the jitter buffer, refer to "9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Site—VoIP-DSP Options" in the PC Programming Manual.
8.1.5 Voice Activity Detection (VAD)

VAD conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network. This feature can be enabled or disabled for codec G.711.
To configure the VAD feature, refer to the appropriate section in the PC Programming Manual.

8.1.6 Network Configuration

You must evaluate the structure of the existing network to see if a VoIP network can be implemented. Below
are the points that should be evaluated.
Is the IP network a managed network?

A VoIP network should be implemented on a managed IP network such as Frame Relay, Leased Line, or
IP-VPN (Virtual Private Network).
An unmanaged network, such as the Internet (including an Internet VPN), cannot be used to employ a VoIP
network because delays and loss in data transmission can cause huge degradation in speech quality.
Is it possible to have static IP addressing?

IP telephones on the network always perform VoIP communications through the PBX. Therefore, the PBX
must be assigned static IP addresses, which must be programmed to each IP telephone on the network.
Note
When the DHCP Server feature is disabled and external DHCP servers are not used, static IP addressing
must also be enabled for all IP telephones.
Does only a single router provide access to the IP network?

In a dual network, 2 routers provide access to the IP network as shown in the diagram below. However, only
one router can be used as an access point to the network.
Therefore, in the diagram below, if router A, whose IP address is assigned as the default gateway IP address
of the PBX and the IP telephones, fails, VoIP communications are no longer possible; they are not able to
switch their default gateway from router A to router B to access the IP network.
IP Network
Router A Router B
Default gateway of Default gateway of

the PBX: Router A the IP Telephone:
Router A

How is the PBX connected to remote extensions?

When the PBX is connected to a remote extensions via public IP network without using IP-VPN, address
translation techniques (e.g., NAT/NAPT) are used. These methods prevent VoIP communications from being
carried out effectively. In such cases, the use of an SBC will avoid this problem.
Note
• An SBC is not required for:
– Connections via a Wide Area Ethernet or LAN
– Connections via IP-VPN
• An SBC is required for:
– Connections via a public IP network
Connection via Wide Area Ethernet or LAN Connection via IP-VPN
Local IP Address Local IP Address

Domain Domain
Switching Hub Router
Global IP Address
Domain
Wide Area
Ethernet/ IP-VPN
LAN
Switching Hub
Router
Local IP Address
Domain

Connection via Public IP Network
Local IP Address
Domain
SBC
Router
Global IP Address
Domain
Public
IP Network
Router
Local IP Address
Domain

Are the network devices located appropriately for effective VoIP

communications?
Transmission delays can cause pauses and loss in VoIP communications. The more network devices (e.g.,
routers and switching hubs) there are between the PBX and IP telephones or the IP network interface, the
longer the transmission delays. This is because a certain amount of delay is inevitable when packets go through
each network device.
To prevent unnecessary delays, it is recommended to connect the PBX as close to the IP telephones and the
IP network interface as possible so that the number of the network devices is kept to a minimum.
IP Network
Router Router
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub

8.1.7 Network Devices
8.1.7 Network Devices

You must evaluate the network devices that are used in the existing network to see if a VoIP network can be
implemented. Below are the points that should be evaluated.
Can the firewall pass packets appropriately?

If the VoIP network contains a firewall, the firewall must be configured appropriately to allow VoIP packets to
pass through the network without being blocked by filtering. For details about the protocols and port numbers
that the PBX uses for VoIP communication, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
The ports for which you need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
Are layer 2 or higher switches used?

Use of repeater hubs can increase the network load, and therefore may result in degradation in speech quality.
To ensure high speech quality, use only layer 2 or higher switches. Use of layer 2 or higher switches is also
strongly recommended for connecting IP telephones.
Note
Note that the port of the switching hub that connects to the mother board should be set to operate under
"Auto Negotiation" mode.
Are Category 5 (CAT 5) or higher cables used for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX?

When connecting network devices, make sure to use CAT 5 or higher cables for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
connection. If other types of cables are used, communication may not be carried out normally.

8.1.8 QoS (Quality of Service)
8.1.8 QoS (Quality of Service)

Some routers permit the configuration of priority control features. This allows the router to give higher priority
to voice packets and lower the rate of loss and delays during transmissions, hence improving speech quality.
It is strongly recommended that you use this feature, especially in networks where traffic is heavy.
Typically, a router identifies what packets to pass in priority by checking the value in the ToS field of the header
of IP packets. The V-IPGW card has the ability to set the ToS field of outgoing voice packets. When the card
is appropriately configured, the router can give voice packets from the card higher priority.
Consult your network administrator when setting the ToS field, as the setting value must conform to the
router’s specifications.
Note
• Some switches also permit the configuration of priority control features. For more information, consult
your network administrator.
• To adjust the value in the ToS field, refer to "9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW" in the PC Programming Manual.

8.1.9 Network Time Protocol (NTP)
8.1.9 Network Time Protocol (NTP)

The PBX can be configured to contact an NTP server to receive and update its time setting automatically.
KX-UT series SIP phones can receive and update their time setting either through the PBX or by contacting
an NTP server directly.
For a SIP phone to receive and update its time setting via the PBX, the NTP server feature must be enabled.
To enable this feature refer to "27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP" in the PC Programming
Manual.
If the NTP server feature is enabled:

• Case 1: An NTP server is specified in Web Maintenance Console.
– The SIP phones use the specified IP address and contact the NTP server directly.
• Case 2: An NTP server is not specified in Web Maintenance Console.
– The SIP phones use the IP address of the PBX as their NTP server.
(The PBX acts as an NTP server for the SIP phones.)
To specify the IP address of the NTP server, refer to "10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &
Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving" in the PC Programming Manual.
If the NTP server feature is disabled, the SIP phones use their own time settings.

8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net
8.2 Information about Using One-look Network

This section gives an overview of using the PBX in One-look networks.
8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net *1
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected as a distributed networked system using a private IP network.
The networked system is called a One-look network. In a One-look network, a KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the
Master unit, which controls the other PBXs, known as Slave units.
The Slave units share setup information and resources controlled by the Master unit. A One-look network is
useful when the network will consist only of KX-NS series PBXs and a private IP network is feasible.
A considerable amount of setup is done automatically by the PBXs, so setup and maintenance is much simpler
than other types of networks, such as a TIE line network. All units can be programmed from one location.
Resource sharing allows users to interact as if they were all connected to one PBX, which eliminates the need
to manage information such as PBX access codes.
*1
NS-Net is a network protocol only used for Panasonic products.
Slave Units
(Up to 15 Units)
KX-NS1000
Master Unit
KX-NS1000
IP Network
.....
Conditions
• Only a KX-NS1000 can serve as a Master unit or Slave unit. Other KX-NS series PBXs can serve only as
Slave units.
• At least one DSP card must be installed in this PBX when it is used as a Slave unit. For details of DSP
cards, refer to "4.3.3 DSP S Card (KX-NS5110), DSP M Card (KX-NS5111), DSP L Card (KX-NS5112)".
• The following features are not available when this PBX is used as a Slave unit.
– SVM (Built-in Simplified Voice Message)
– PT system programming
– ISDN/Analogue remote maintenance
• The following resources will be reduced when this PBX is used as a Slave unit.

8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net
Feature Standalone operation One-look network
SMDR Call Storage 40,000 calls 1000 calls

Call Billing for Guest Room 10,000 calls 4000 calls
Networking Notes
• It is recommended that One-look networks be located in one country/area. Operation cannot be guaranteed
for One-look networks that span multiple countries/areas.
• For information about compatible equipment in your country/area when the PBX is used as Slave unit,
consult your dealer.
References
For details about programming and using One-look network, refer to the appropriate documentation for the
KX-NS1000.

8.3.1 Avoid Multiple IP Networks
8.3 H.323 Trunks

This section explains information that is necessary for setting up a H.323 QSIG network over an IP network.
8.3.1 Avoid Multiple IP Networks

A huge degradation in speech quality will be produced when calls are made through multiple IP networks as
shown below; therefore, it is recommended that you avoid establishing a VoIP network in this fashion.
PSTN/
BRI QSIG, etc.
IP Network 1 IP Network 2
IP Network 1 IP Network 2

8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment
8.3.2 Gatekeeper
The following are the general functions of a gatekeeper:
• Dialled number-to-IP address translation
• Authentication
• Bandwidth control
The gatekeeper provides these network management functions to registered clients. To register with the
gatekeeper, you need to configure the V-IPGW card to use the gatekeeper and programme the GK Settings
table through system programming. For details, refer to "9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW— Gatekeeper Available" and "9.11.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings" in the PC Programming
Manual. After programming, the V-IPGW card attempts to register with the gatekeeper using registration
information such as the IP address of the mother board, and destination telephone numbers specified in the
GK Settings table.
Note
• For more information about gatekeeper functions, consult the documentation of the gatekeeper.
• When using a gatekeeper, make sure to choose a compatible model. For more information about
gatekeeper compatibility with the V-IPGW card, consult a certified dealer.

When using the IP telephones and V-IPGW card, you must ensure that the IP network in use has enough
bandwidth to support VoIP communications. If the amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications is
more than the network can accommodate, speech quality will be compromised. In addition, there may be an
adverse effect on the performance of other applications (e.g., e-mail or Web applications) that use the same
network. Therefore, care must be taken when assessing bandwidth requirements.
Inform your network administrator of the required bandwidth, and make sure that the network can support VoIP
communications even under conditions of maximum network traffic.
Bandwidth Assessment for IP Extension Card

Required Bandwidth per IP Telephone for a Call
The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending intervals is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codecs and packet sending intervals, in terms of speech quality:
• The speech quality of the codecs varies as follows: (High) G.722, G.711, G.729A (Low)*1
• The shorter the packet sending interval, the higher the speech quality.
• The higher the speech quality the IP telephones provide, the more bandwidth the IP telephones require.
*1
When the preferred codec of each party differs, the call will be established using the lower codec. For example, if the caller prefers
G.711 while the called party prefers G.729A, the call will be established using G.729A.
Packet Sending Interval

Codec
20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms
G.722*1/G.711 87.2 kbps 79.5 kbps — —

G.729A 31.2 kbps 23.5 kbps 19.6 kbps 15.7 kbps
*1
G.722 is only available for calls between KX-NT300 series IP-PTs, KX-NT500 series IP-PTs, and some SIP phones that support this
codec during peer-to-peer communication. For details, refer to "5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection" in the Feature Guide.

Required Bandwidth for Each IP Extension Card

To allow all IP telephones to make calls simultaneously, it is necessary to keep available the bandwidth required
by an IP extension card with the maximum number of IP telephones connected.
Provided below is the formula to calculate the amount of bandwidth required for each IP extension card.
When using the V-IPEXT/V-SIPEXT card:
Required Bandwidth = (Required Bandwidth per IP telephone ´ 32)
Bandwidth Assessment for V-IPGW Card

Required Bandwidth for One VoIP Channel
The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending intervals is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codec and packet sending interval, in terms of the speech quality:
• The speech quality of the G.711 codec is higher than that of the G.729A codec.
• The higher the speech quality the V-IPGW card provides, the more bandwidth the card requires.
Via LAN

Codec
20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms 90 ms
G.711 87.2 kbps 79.5 kbps 75.6 kbps 71.7 kbps —

G.729A 31.2 kbps 23.5 kbps 19.6 kbps 15.7 kbps —
Via WAN (PPP: Point-to-Point Protocol)

Codec
20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms 90 ms
G.711 84 kbps 77.3 kbps 74 kbps 70.7 kbps —

G.729A 28 kbps 21 kbps 18 kbps 14.7 kbps —
Bandwidth Calculation
Provided below is the formula to find out the amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications:
Required Bandwidth
= (No. of Fax Machines ´ Required Bandwidth for the G.711 codec) +
[(16 - No. of Fax Machines) ´ Required Bandwidth for Voice Communication]
Example
Consider the following case as an example:
• Communication: via LAN
• No. of Fax Machines: 2
• G.711 Packet Sending Interval: 20 ms (requiring 87.2 kbps per channel)
• G.729A Packet Sending Interval for Voice Communication: 20 ms (requiring 31.2 kbps per channel)
In this case, the required bandwidth will be as follows:
Required Bandwidth
= (2 ´ 87.2) + [(16 - 2) ´ 31.2]
= 611.2 (kbps)

Therefore, inform your network administrator and make sure that the network can support a bandwidth of
611.2 kbps even when the network is under conditions of maximum traffic.
Note
It is recommended that all cards on a VoIP network have the same packet sending interval.
Additional Information
As described above, it is possible to control the required bandwidth by selecting a certain combination of codec
and packet sending interval. However, it is also possible to control required bandwidth by limiting the number
of available virtual VoIP channels.
The V-IPGW16 card supports a total of 8 ports, each having 2 separate channels. By disabling some of the
ports, you can reduce the bandwidth required for VoIP communications.
To limit the number of VoIP channels:

Set the status of the ports you wish to disable (starting from the highest-numbered port) to OUS.
For example, if you wish to use only 10 of the available 16 virtual VoIP channels (i.e., disable 6 channels), set
ports 8, 7, and 6 to OUS as shown below:
In this case, the equation for bandwidth calculation, based on the previous example, will change as follows:
Required Bandwidth
= (No. of Fax Machines ´ Required Bandwidth for the G.711 codec) +
[(10 - No. of Fax Machines) ´ Required Bandwidth for Voice Communication]
= (2 ´ 87.2) + [(10 - 2) ´ 31.2]
= 424 (kbps)

8.3.4 Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications
8.3.4 Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications

For details about the RFCs and protocols for the V-IPGW card, refer to the following specifications.
ITU-T H.323
H.225.0
H.245
Codecs G.711 (a-law and µ-law)
G.729A
Voice Operations Echo Cancellation (48 ms)
Jitter Buffer (200 ms)
VAD (Voice Activity Detection)*1
PLC (Packet Loss Concealment)
DTMF Relay Inband/Outband (RFC2833)/Outband (H.245)
Fax Relay G.711 Inband/T.38
Protocol/Function RTP
RTCP
*1
VAD is only available for codec G.711.

8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
8.4 SIP Trunks

This section provides information on using SIP trunks with the PBX.

The Virtual SIP Trunk Card (V-SIPGW) is a virtual trunk card which is designed to be easily integrated into an
Internet Telephony Service provided by an ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider).
As a major SIP Provider, an ITSP provides its telephony service partly through the conventional telephone
network (e.g., ISDN and Mobile), which is fee-based. An ISP (Internet Service Provider), another major SIP
Provider, does not provide telephone connection itself. However, providing its users with Internet access, an
ISP provides voice communication on the Internet for free. In this way, with VoIP technology based on the SIP
protocol, the cost of voice communication can be much cheaper than conventional telephone networks. A
maximum of 4 V-SIPGW16 cards can be installed to the virtual slots of the PBX. The channel capacity of the
card allows users to connect to up to 32 different ISP/ITSPs.
V-SIPGW Connection Outline

The following diagram illustrates a simple VoIP network connecting the V-SIPGW card to the Internet.
WAN (Wide Area Network)
Internet
ITSP
Local
Telephone
ISP
LAN Router
(Local Area Network)
Switching
Hub
PC
IP-PT
PBX with
V-SIPGW Card
Requirements for Internet Telephony Service

• You need to subscribe with an ISP for Internet connection.

• You need to subscribe with an ITSP for telephone connection. The ISP and ITSP may be part of the same
company.
Note
• VoIP communication using the V-SIPGW card may deteriorate depending on the ITSP being used.
• VoIP communication using the V-SIPGW card may deteriorate depending on the network conditions.
DNS (Domain Name System)

A DNS server normally provides the name resolution service for your PC. As domain names are alphabetic,
they are easier to remember. The Internet, however, is based on IP addresses. Therefore, every time a domain
name is used, a DNS server must translate the name into the corresponding IP address, and vice versa. For
example, the domain name www.example.com may be translated to 192.0.34.166. If one DNS server does
not know how to translate a particular domain name, it asks another one, and so on, until the correct IP address
is returned.
NAT Traversal
When NAT/NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) is enabled, the router translates a local IP address from
the PBX into a global IP address. However, the router with NAT enabled does not translate local IP addresses
stored in SIP messages into global IP addresses.
Therefore, the address which the SIP Server recognises as the destination IP address to reply to is actually
the local IP address of the PBX, not the global IP address of the router. Therefore, if the SIP Server receives
a SIP message from the PBX and sends a message back to the PBX using the address stored in the SIP
message, the packet information will not reach the PBX.
STUN Servers function to solve the global IP address problem under certain NAT conditions, for example, in
case of full duplex communication. A STUN Server, used alongside the SIP Server, finds out the global IP
address of the router with NAT enabled. With the STUN feature enabled, the packet information sent by the
SIP Server is able to "traverse" NAT and reach the PBX.
The settings can be configured to specify whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each ISP/ITSP. In
addition, the NAT Traversal method can be selected from "STUN" and "Fixed IP Address". For details, refer
to "9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW" in the PC Programming
Manual.
The V-SIPGW card may require the NAT Traversal feature to be enabled to connect to the WAN via a router.
The following diagram illustrates how VoIP communication is enabled between the V-SIPGW card and the SIP
Server (SIP Receiver) via a router with NAT enabled.

WAN
Internet
STUN Fixed IP Address

STUN SIP SIP
Server Server Server
ISP/ITSP
ISP/ITSP
LAN
Router
(NAT enabled)
Switching
Hub
PC
IP-PT
PBX with
V-SIPGW Card
Note
• If an ISP/ITSP uses a device such as SBC (Session Border Controller), you may not have to enable
the NAT Traversal feature.
• A STUN Server is supplied by an ISP/ITSP, and not included with the PBX.

8.4.4 Bandwidth Requirements
8.4.2 SIP Requirements

Port Requirements
Required Ports for Each Channel
When configuring a router with NAT enabled, you need to secure a certain number of ports for each SIP and
RTP/RTCP channel. For RTP/RTCP, the number of required ports is double the number of activated SIP trunks
(Ch). For SIP signalling, the number of required ports is always one regardless of the number of activated SIP
trunks (Ch).
<Example>
If 4 SIP trunk channels are activated, you need the following number of ports:
Protocol Type Required Port
RTP 4
RTCP 4
SIP 1
Total 9
Firewall Requirements
pass through the network without being blocked by filtering. For the protocols and port numbers that the PBX
uses for VoIP communication, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
The ports for which you need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
8.4.3 Router Requirements

• Port Forwarding:
It may be necessary to set the NAT router so that it forwards the incoming packets to the IP address of the
V-SIPGW card if all of the following conditions are met:
– the PBX uses a STUN server;
– a V-SIPGW card is located under a NAT router;
– incoming packets are routed to a SIP Client port or NAT Voice (RTP) UDP port indicated in "8.6 Port
Security".
• SIP-NAT Feature:
When a V-SIPGW card is located under a NAT router that supports the SIP-NAT feature*1, it is
recommended to disable this feature.
*1
When NAT is enabled, the router translates the IP address stored in the IP header and the port number stored in the UDP header.
When SIP-NAT is enabled, the router also translates the IP address and port number stored in SIP messages.

When using the V-SIPGW card, you must ensure that the WAN has enough bandwidth to support VoIP
communications. Refer to the table below and ensure that the sum of the required bandwidth for each channel
is smaller than the amount the WAN (e.g., ADSL network) can provide.

Note that the amount in the table is only a guide. Subscribe to a network that has enough bandwidth. If the
amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications is larger than what the network can accommodate,
speech quality will be compromised.
Required Bandwidth for Each Channel

The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending interval is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codec and packet sending interval, in terms of the speech quality:
• The speech quality of the codecs varies as follows: G.711 (High), G.729A (Low)
• The higher the speech quality the V-SIPGW card provides, the more bandwidth the WAN requires.
Codec
10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms
G.711 110.4 kbps 87.2 kbps 79.5 kbps 75.6 kbps 73.3 kbps 71.7 kbps
G.729A 54.4 kbps 31.2 kbps 23.5 kbps 19.6 kbps 17.3 kbps 15.7 kbps

8.4.5 Virtual SIP Trunk Card Specifications
8.4.5 Virtual SIP Trunk Card Specifications

For details about the RFCs and protocols for the V-SIPGW card, refer to the following specifications.
Items Specification
SIP RFCs RFC3261 (UDP only)

RFC3262 (PRACK)
RFC3264 (Offer/Answer)
RFC3311 (UPDATE)
RFC3581 (Symmetric Response Routing/rport)
RFC4028 (Session Timer)
Codecs G.711 (a-law and µ-law)
G.729A
Voice Options Echo Cancellation (48 ms)
Jitter Buffer (200 ms)
VAD (Voice Activity Detection)*1
PLC (Packet Loss Concealment)
DTMF Relay Inband/Outband (RFC2833)/Outband (SIP INFO)
Fax Relay G.711 Inband/T.38
Protocol/Function RTP
RTCP
DNS (A/SRV)
NAT Traversal (STUN)
QoS (ToS field setting in IP header of RTP/RTCP)
*1
VAD is only available for codec G.711.

8.5.1 H.323 QSIG Network
8.5 Types of PBX Networks

This section gives an overview of the types of networks the PBX can participate in.
8.5.1 H.323 QSIG Network

This section gives an overview of H.323 QSIG networks.
Image of a H.323 QSIG network:
H.323 QSIG
Network
Node 1: Node 2:
Main Unit*1 KX-NCP500
Resources for Node 1 Resources for Node 2
*1
KX-NS500
Features
• H.323 QSIG networks can include non-KX-NS series PBXs (e.g., KX-TDE200, KX-NCP500).
• Resources are not available to extension users of other PBX without explicit configuration.
Conditions
• PBXs in an H.323 QSIG network must be connected over a private IP network.
Bandwidth Requirements
Refer to "8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment".
Required Items
• V-IPGW: Virtual VoIP Gateway Card
Note
• The following activation key is required for enhanced QSIG network features (NDSS, Centralised Voice
Mail, etc.).
– KX-NSN002: Activation Key for QSIG Network (QSIG Network)
• For more details about H.323 QSIG networks, refer to "4.3.1 TIE Line Service" in the Feature Guide.
• For details about configuring and programming a H.323 QSIG network, refer to " TIE Line Access"

8.6 Port Security
8.6 Port Security

pass through certain ports of the ports listed below without being blocked by filtering. The ports for which you
need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
The following table shows the PBX’s ports used for IP communications. Any access to the ports not in this list
is ignored.
Port Numbers for LAN Port

Changeable/
Port Number Protocol Application Client/Server
Fixed
25 TCP/UDP SMTP Server Changeable
53 UDP DNS Server Fixed
67 UDP DHCP Server Changeable
68 UDP DHCP Client Changeable
80 TCP HTTP Server Changeable
123 UDP NTP Server Fixed
143 TCP IMAP Server Changeable
161 UDP SNMP Server Changeable
443 TCP HTTPS Server Changeable
465 TCP/UDP SMTP over SSL Server Changeable
993 TCP IMAP over SSL Server Changeable
1717 UDP Connectionless UDP - Changeable
1718 TCP Connectionless TCP - Changeable
1719 UDP H.225 RAS - Changeable
1720 TCP H.225 Call Signal - Changeable
2103 TCP CMM Server Fixed
2300 TCP Telnet-SMDR - Changeable
2727 UDP MGCP*1 - Changeable
3493 TCP UPS*2 - Fixed
3702 UDP WSD Server Changeable
4560–4561 UDP PSAP - Changeable
4562 UDP SSAP - Changeable
5060 UDP SIP UA (EXT) - Changeable
7547 TCP CWMP Server Changeable
7580 TCP HTTP Server Changeable

8.6 Port Security
Changeable/
Fixed
9300 UDP PTAP - Changeable
10000– TCP H.323 Dynamic Port - Changeable
10895 (H.225 Send, H.245 Send/
Receive, Connection-less
[TCP] Send Port)
20000 TCP UM-VMA*3 Server Fixed
30021 TCP/UDP FTP/FTPS Server Changeable
32727 UDP MGCP*1 for IP-CS - Changeable
33090 UDP ACS-MDW Server Fixed
33091
33092 TCP
33131
33321 TCP Access Point Login (Telnet) Server Changeable
33333 TCP CTI 3rd Party Connection - Changeable
33334 TCP CTI 1st Party Connection - Changeable
33478 UDP STUN Client Changeable
33702 UDP ACS-MDW (WSD) Server Fixed
35060 UDP SIP UA (CO) - Changeable
37547 TCP CWMP Server Changeable
37580 TCP HTTPS Server Changeable
39300 UDP PTAP for IP-CS - Changeable
40000– TCP/UDP FTP/FTPS-Data Server Changeable
40095
50000– UDP SNMP TRAP Client Fixed
65535
(Ephemeral) TCP/UDP FTP Client
TCP/UDP FTP/FTPS-Data Client
UDP NTP Client
UDP DNS Client
UDP SYSLOG Client
TCP/UDP SMTP Client
TCP/UDP SMTP over SSL Client
TCP/UDP POP3 Client

8.6 Port Security
Changeable/
Fixed
TCP/UDP ACS-MDW Server
*1
Media Gateway Control Protocol. Used for call control command data and LCD/LED data transmission.
*2
Used by UPS daemon.
*3
Used by Unified Messaging.
Port Numbers for Optional DSP Card

Changeable/
Fixed
12000– UDP RTP/RTCP - Changeable
13535
16000– UDP RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal - Changeable
18047

8.6 Port Security

Section 9
Appendix
This section provides information about System Prompt

Languages and the revision history.

9.1 System Prompt Languages
9.1 System Prompt Languages

Note
• The following abbreviations are used in the language file names:
– UK: United Kingdom
– US: United States
– LA: Latin America
– CA: Canada
– BR: Brazil
• No. 1 is set by default. For details, see "24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System
Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting" in the PC Programming Manual.
System prompt languages stored in the System Memory

KX-NS500
AG BR BX LA NE
Suffix
No. 1 LA-Spanish BR-Portuguese US-English US-English UK-English
(Primary)
No. 2 US-English US-English LA-Spanish LA-Spanish Spanish
No. 3 - - French French French
No. 4 - - - - German
No. 5 - - - - Dutch
No. 6 - - - - Italian
No. 7 - - - - Swedish
No. 8 - - - - -
KX-NS500
RU SU UC UE
Suffix
No. 1 Russian US-English Ukrainian US-English
(Primary)
No. 2 Ukrainian LA-Spanish Russian LA-Spanish
No. 3 US-English French US-English French
No. 4 - - - -
No. 5 - - - -
No. 6 - - - -
No. 7 - - - -
No. 8 - - - -

9.2.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
9.2 Revision History

New Contents
• 4.5.3 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
• 4.5.4 BRI2 Card (KX-NS5282)
• 4.5.5 BRI4 Card (KX-NS5284)
• 8.2 Information about Using One-look Network
Changed Contents
• System Components
• Introduction
• 1.1 For Your Safety
• 2.1.1 System Configurations
• 2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
• 2.2.1 Optional Equipment
• 2.3.1 General Description
• 2.3.3 System Capacity
• 3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
• 4.2.1 Unpacking
• 4.2.2 Names and Locations
• 4.2.7 Types of Connectors
• 4.2.8 Attaching a Ferrite Core
• 4.2.9 19-inch Rack Mounting
• 4.5.2 PRI30/E1 Card (KX-NS5290CE)
• 5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console
• 5.2 PC Connection
• 5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
• 5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
• 5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters
• 5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters
• 5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
• 5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
• 5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
• 5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes
• 7.1.3 Operation
• 7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log
• 8.6 Port Security
• Section 9 Appendix


Notes

For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record
the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to
aid in identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Web Site: http://www.panasonic.net/
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014
PNQX6303VA CC0114AH4104

Panasonic Manual de Instalacion KX ns500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic Manual de Instalacion KX ns500

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic Manual de Instalacion KX ns500

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual

Model No. KX-NS500

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

KX-NS500: PFMPR Software File Version 004.10000 or later

Main Unit KX-NS500 Main Unit

Category Model No. Description

KX-NSM701 1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (1 SIP

Category Model No. Description

KX-NSA020 Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection (CSTA

Category Model No. Description

KX-NSB0016 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 Ports)

Category Model No. Description

KX-NSB0716 Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16

DSP Card Slot KX-NS5110 VoIP DSP Card (S Type) (DSP S)

Category Model No. Description

Expansion Master KX-NS5130 Expansion Master Card (EXP-M)

System Components for Expansion Unit

SPR KX-NS520 Expansion Unit

Equipment Compatibility for Main Unit

Equipment Compatibility for Expansion Unit

The Structure of this Manual

About the Other Manuals

About the software version of your PBX

4.3.9 MCSLC16 in KX-NS520 (installed by default) ..............................................................136

5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site .......................................................................260

This section provides important information intended to

1.1 For Your Safety

This notice means that misuse could result in death

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

For the PBX

For the PBX

• Do not install the system in the following locations:

For the PBX

1.2 Important Safety Instructions

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

The KX-NS500NE is designed to interwork with the:

Contact to Authorised Representative:

1.4 Data Security

What is User Information?

This section provides general information on the PBX,

2.1 Basic System Construction

2.1.1 System Configurations

Stacking Expansion Unit KX-NS520

Expansion Unit *2 Expansion Unit *2 Expansion Unit *2

EXP-S EXP-S EXP-S

One-Look Network with NS-Net *1

H.323 QSIG network

2.1.2 System Connection Diagram

WAN Remote PC IP-PT IP Softphone, SIP-CS S-PS IP-CS PS CTI Server PC

External Sensor Expansion Unit*5

Doorphone & Door Opener

BGM/Music On Hold (MOH) PC

Main Unit*2 System Connection Diagram

ISDN PRI/E1 PRI30/E1 EXP-M

ISDN BRI Line BRI2

SLT Wireless Phone Fax Machine

DHLC4 DTP I/F PS

USB Memory Device USB

Expansion Unit 2 Expansion Unit 2 Expansion Unit *2

DPT1 DPT1 DPT*1 PC

LCOT6 —1 —1 —1 —1 —*1 ü

MCSLC16 —1 —1 —1 —1 —*1